JP5209887B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a coin gaming machine. Specifically, the first start area provided in the game area, the second start area provided in the game area, and the first variable in the variable display based on the winning of the game ball in the first start area. The first variation display means for starting the variation display of the first identification information when the start condition of 1 is satisfied and deriving and displaying the display result, and the variation based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting area When the second display start condition is satisfied, the second identification information is started to be displayed in a variable manner, the second variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, the first state in which the game ball can win and the gaming machine wins A start operation state that is controllable to any one of the impossible second states and is in the first state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display means or the second variation display means. Variable winning ball apparatus controlled by The device is provided with a winning area, and when the game ball is won in a special area of the winning area of the variable winning ball apparatus controlled to the start operation state, the variable winning ball apparatus is set to the first state. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state to be controlled.

  As a game machine generally known as this type of game machine, it is possible to play a predetermined game using a game ball, and the game ball won in the first start area provided in the game area. Based on this, the first variation display means for performing the variation display of the first identification information such as the first symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and that the game ball has won the second starting area provided in the game area And second variation display means for deriving and displaying the second identification information such as the second symbol based on the first variation display means, and displaying the specific display result (big hit) on the first variation display means or the second variation display means. When a display result is derived and displayed, there is a game that is shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine having such two variable display means, when the display result of the first identification information or the second identification information as described above becomes a special display result (probability change jackpot display result), the specific game There is a case where the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result after the state ends is controlled to a high probability state in which the probability is higher than the normal state. In the conventional gaming machine, when determining whether or not to control to such a high probability state, the probability of determining to control to the high probability state based on the fluctuation display result of the first identification information, and the second identification There is one in which the probability of determining to control to a high probability state based on the information fluctuation display result is different (Patent Document 1).
JP-A-2005-342262 (paragraph numbers 0141 to 0144, FIG. 10)

  However, the conventional gaming machine as described above has the following problems. In the above-described gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is determined to control to the high probability state based on the variation display result of the first identification information and to control to the high probability state based on the variation display result of the second identification information. For example, the identification information on either one of the fluctuation display means is frequently controlled to a high probability state, or conversely, it is almost no longer controlled to high probability information. The contents of the game based on the variation display result between the means and the second variation display means are extremely biased to either one, and the interest of the game may be impaired.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is not to impair the fun of the game with respect to the gaming machine in which the variation display is performed by the first variation display means and the second variation display means. It is possible to diversify games.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A first start area (first start winning opening 13) provided in the game area, a second start area (for example, second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area, and the first When the first start condition of the variable display is established based on the winning of the game ball in one start area, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol or the first decorative symbol) is started. The first variation display means for deriving and displaying the display result (for example, the first special symbol display 8a or the first decorative symbol display 9a) and the variation based on the game ball winning in the second starting area When the second start condition of display is satisfied, the second variation display means (for example, the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol or the second decorative symbol) starts to be displayed and the display result is derived and displayed) The second special symbol display 8b and the second decorative symbol display 9b) The first variation display can be controlled to either a first state (for example, an open state) in which game balls can be won or a second state (for example, a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won. Or a variable winning ball device (for example, variable winning ball device 20) that is controlled to a start operation state that becomes a first state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the second variation display means, The variable winning ball apparatus is provided with a winning area, and when a game ball wins a special area (for example, the specific winning opening 30) among the winning areas of the variable winning ball apparatus controlled to the start operation state. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shifts the variable winning ball device to a specific gaming state that is repeatedly controlled a predetermined number of times in a first state and a second state ,
The variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to the first state by deriving and displaying a predetermined specific display result on the first fluctuation display means or the second fluctuation display means (for example, FIG. 32 in the first special symbol process). S81 of FIG. 40, the part for executing the processes of S133 and S139 of FIG. 40, the second special symbol process, and the part corresponding to these processes in the first special symbol process). Predetermining means for determining whether to display and display the display result and the control mode of the variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state occurs before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display (for example, S62, S63a and S83 in FIG. 32 in the first special symbol process, S83a, S83b and S83d in FIG. 33, and the first special symbol process in the second special symbol process. A portion) of a process corresponding to those of the processing in the symbol process treatment,
In the specific gaming state, gaming state control means (for example, S83g in FIG. 33, SA511 to SA517 in FIG. 47) for executing control of the variable winning ball apparatus in the control mode determined by the pre-determining means;
A winning detection means (for example, a prize winning switch 34a, 34b, a specific area switch 30a) for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball apparatus and outputting a detection signal;
When the variable winning ball apparatus is not controlled to the first state (for example, when the error detection prohibition flag is not set (SA569), or the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag is 7, 8 10 or 11, 14 (SA569a)), an abnormality determining means for determining that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, SA451, SA516). , Part for executing the processing of SA569 to SA574),
The predetermining means sets the control state of the variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state is generated in the first state in the specific gaming state generated after the variation display executed by the second variation display means. such that the total period controlled is than the total period controlled to a first state in a specific game state that occurs after the variable display that is performed by the first variable display means, a relatively long period Determined (for example, the first big hit symbol table, the second big hit symbol table, the first quasi big hit symbol table and the second quasi big hit symbol table in FIGS. 15A to 15D, 95 and 96),
The game state control means controls the variable winning ball apparatus when data indicating a game progress state (for example, a first special symbol process flag or a second special symbol process flag) indicates a numerical value other than a predetermined range of numerical values. Control to the first state (for example, execute the processing of S305b, S305c, S307, S310, S311 shown in FIG. 15)
The abnormality determining means determines that the abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal when the data indicating the game progress state indicates a numerical value within a predetermined range (for example, in the process of SA569B) The value of the first special symbol process flag is any one of 0, 6, 9, 11, 12, and 15).

According to such a configuration, the control mode of the variable winning ball apparatus when the specific game state occurs is controlled to the first state in the specific game state generated after the variable display executed by the second variable display means. Is determined so that the total period is relatively longer than the total period controlled to the first state in the specific gaming state generated after the variation display executed by the first variation display means. The game using the first variation display means and the second variation display means can be diversified. Furthermore, the specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variation display means or the second variation display means without requiring a game ball to be awarded to a special area in the variable winning ball apparatus during the starting operation state. Sometimes, since the variable winning ball apparatus is in the first state, the variability of the game can be improved and the interest is improved. Further, when the data indicating the game progress state indicates a numerical value within a predetermined range, the abnormal determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal. It can be appropriately determined whether or not.

(2) a first start area provided in the game area (for example, the first start winning opening 13), a second start area provided in the game area (for example, the second start winning opening 14), When the first start condition of the variable display is satisfied based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting area, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol or the first decorative symbol) is displayed. Based on the first variation display means for starting and displaying the display result (for example, the first special symbol display 8a and the first decorative symbol display 9a) and the game ball winning in the second starting area Second variation display means for starting the variation display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol or the second decorative symbol) when the second variation display start condition is satisfied, and deriving and displaying the display result ( For example, the second special symbol display 8b or the second decorative symbol display Device 9b), and can be controlled to any one of a first state (for example, an open state) in which game balls can be won and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won, A variable winning ball device (for example, a variable winning ball device 20) controlled to a start operation state that is in a first state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the first fluctuation display means or the second fluctuation display means; A specific variable winning ball apparatus (e.g., controllable to either a first state (e.g., an open state) in which a game ball can be won or a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win) A variable prize ball device is provided with a prize area, and a special area (for example, for example, among the prize areas of the variable prize ball apparatus controlled in the start operation state) A game ball is placed in the special winning opening 30) When award, the a specific variable winning ball apparatus in the first state and the gaming machine to shift to the specific game state to control repeated a predetermined number of times in the second state,
The specific variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to the first state by deriving and displaying a predetermined specific display result on the first fluctuation display means or the second fluctuation display means (for example, in the ninth embodiment, In the first special symbol process, in the first special symbol process, the part that executes the process corresponding to the process of S81 in FIG. 32, the part that executes the process in S133 and S139 in FIG. Whether or not the predetermined display result is derived and displayed, and the control mode of the specific variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state occurs. Predetermining means for determining the display result of the variable display before derivation display (for example, S62, S63a, S83 in FIG. 32 in the first special symbol process) 3 S83a, S83b, the second special symbol process treatment, a portion) of a process corresponding to those of the processing in the first special symbol process treatment,
In the specific gaming state, gaming state control means (for example, S83g in FIG. 33, SA511 to SA517 in FIG. 47) for executing the control of the specific variable winning ball apparatus in the control mode determined by the pre-determining means;
Winning detection means for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball apparatus and outputting a detection signal (for example, a prize winning switch 34a, 34b, a specific area switch 30a);
When the variable winning ball apparatus is not controlled to the first state (for example, when the second error detection prohibition flag is not set in the ninth embodiment (SA569A), or in the tenth embodiment, Abnormality in which it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal when the 1 special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag is not 7, 8, 10, 11, 14 (SA569B)) Judgment means (for example, a part for executing the processing of SA451A, SA569A, SA570 to SA574 in the game control microcomputer 560 in the ninth embodiment. Or in the game control microcomputer 560 in the tenth embodiment. SA451A, SA569B, SA570 to SA574 Portion executes the processing.) And includes a
The predetermining means sets the control mode of the specific variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state occurs in the specific gaming state generated after the variation display executed by the second variation display means . the total period controlled in state, the than the total period controlled to the first state in the specific game state that occurs after the variable display that is performed by the first variable display means, so that a relatively long period determining (e.g., FIG. 15 (a) ~ (d), FIG. 95, the first big hit symbol table and a second jackpot symbol table and the first quasi big hit symbol table and the second level jackpot symbol table of FIG. 96),
The game state control means controls the variable winning ball apparatus when data indicating a game progress state (for example, a first special symbol process flag or a second special symbol process flag) indicates a numerical value other than a predetermined range of numerical values. Control to the first state (for example, execute the processing of S305b, S305c, S307, S310, S311 shown in FIG. 15)
The abnormality determining means determines that the abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal when the data indicating the game progress state indicates a numerical value within a predetermined range (for example, in the process of SA569B) The value of the first special symbol process flag is any one of 0, 6, 9, 11, 12, and 15).

According to such a configuration, the control mode of the specific variable winning ball apparatus when the specific game state occurs is controlled to the first state in the specific game state that occurs after the variable display executed by the second variable display means. The total period to be played is determined to be a relatively longer period than the total period controlled to the first state in the specific gaming state that occurs after the variation display executed by the first variation display means. In addition, games using the first variation display means and the second variation display means can be diversified. Further, when the specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variation display means or the second variation display means without requiring the winning of the game ball to the special area in the variable winning ball apparatus during the starting operation state. In addition, since the specific variable winning ball apparatus is in the first state, the variability of the game can be improved and the interest is improved. Further, when the data indicating the game progress state indicates a numerical value within a predetermined range, the abnormal determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal. It can be appropriately determined whether or not.

(3) with pre-Symbol variable winning ball discharge detection hand stage device enters the game balls outputs an identifiable detection signal that has been discharged from the variable winning ball device (e.g., character object discharge switch 29a) further ,
The abnormality determining means is further configured by the discharge detecting means that the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus is discharged from the variable winning ball apparatus when the variable winning ball apparatus changes to the first state. on condition that the detected, you determined that the winning detecting means abnormal prize based on the inputs a detection signal to be output has occurred (e.g., in the gaming control microcomputer 560, SA451, SA516, SA569~SA574 The “error detection prohibition flag” is reset when the in-function game ball number counter reaches 0 when the start operation or the big hit game ends (SA449, SA451, SA506, SA516 reference), also for example, the ninth game control microcomputer 56 in the embodiment of In FIG. 4, the part for executing the processing of SA451A, SA569A, SA570 to SA574, or the part for executing the processing of SA451A, SA569B, SA570 to SA574 in the game control microcomputer 560 in the tenth embodiment. 2 error detection inhibit flag ", when the starting operation is finished, and is reset when the character object within the game ball number counter becomes 0 (SA449A, SA451A reference) wherein the this.

According to such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device has changed to the first state, on condition that the game ball entering the variable winning ball device is determined to have been discharged from the variable winning ball device, Since it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal output by the winning detection means, it is possible to avoid being determined as an abnormal winning even though a regular game is being executed, and an abnormal winning is achieved. There is an effect that it is possible to reliably detect and notify the occurrence of the occurrence.

( 4 ) Abnormality in which abnormality notification is provided by an effect device (for example, effect display device 9, speaker 27, lamp / LED) provided in the gaming machine based on a command transmitted by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game Informing means (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the processing of S906 to S909, S906A to S909A, S916 to S919),
The game control means includes
When the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball device has occurred, an abnormality notification command transmitting means (for example, a ninth embodiment) for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification. In the game control microcomputer 560 in the form, a part for executing the processing of SA580A),
A specific abnormality notification command transmitting means (for example, a ninth abnormality notification command transmitting means for transmitting a specific abnormality notification command for instructing the execution of abnormality notification when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormal winning to the specific variable winning ball apparatus has occurred. In the game control microcomputer 560 in the embodiment of
The abnormality notifying means is capable of distinguishing between an abnormal winning (for example, a second abnormal winning) to the variable winning ball apparatus and an abnormal winning (for example, a first abnormal winning) to the specific variable winning ball apparatus. (See FIG. 116).

  According to such a configuration, the abnormality notification means is configured to perform abnormality notification so as to be able to distinguish between an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus and an abnormal winning to the specific variable winning ball apparatus. It is possible to easily distinguish an abnormal winning regarding the winning ball apparatus and an abnormal winning regarding the specific variable winning ball apparatus.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine, and a first start area provided in the gaming area. The first identification information when the first start condition of the variable display is satisfied based on the second start area provided in the game area and the game ball winning in the first start area. First variation display means for starting variation display and deriving and displaying a display result; and second when a second start condition for variation display is established based on the winning of a game ball in the second start area It is possible to control the state of the second variation display means for starting the variation display of the identification information and deriving and displaying the display result, the first state where the game ball can win, or the second state where the game machine cannot win The first variation display means or the second variation table And a variable winning ball apparatus controlled to a starting operation state that is in a first state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the means, the variable winning ball apparatus is provided with a winning area, and the starting operation state A gaming machine that shifts the variable winning ball apparatus to a specific gaming state that controls the variable winning ball apparatus to a first state when a game ball wins a special area of the winning area of the variable winning ball apparatus controlled by Also good.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 6 as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. The lower part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 has an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and the speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game balls (ie, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 5 for adjusting the height).

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device by rotating the operation knob 5. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 5 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device gradually increases, and when it exceeds a predetermined speed, Enters the left area of the game area 7 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 5 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 7 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 5 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device, and to adjust the area into which the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  A variable winning ball apparatus 20 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 7. An ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 that forms the start winning opening 13 is provided. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening 13 is detected by the start opening switch 13 a and guided to the back of the game board 6. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by a solenoid 15a. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 13 and is detected by the start opening switch 13a, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened twice. The state where the variable winning ball device 20 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start winning port switch 13a in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be referred to as a big winning opening or an accessory. In addition, the game board 6 is provided with various kinds of winnings. Hereinafter, the winning combination means the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened and closed a predetermined number of times, that is, a predetermined number of rounds when the start condition of the big hit game is satisfied. This state is called a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, a high percentage is won, and a large number of game balls are paid out to the player.

  A special symbol display 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided at the lower right of the variable winning ball apparatus 20. The special symbol display 8 is constituted by, for example, two 7-segment displays.

  Below the special symbol display 8 is provided a special symbol start memory display 18 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls in which a game ball has entered the starting winning port 13, that is, the starting memory number. The special symbol start memory display 18 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start memory display 18 increments the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the start winning opening 13. Each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start memory display 18 shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8.

  Above the variable winning ball device 20, there is provided an effect display device 9 including a plurality of variable display portions each variably displaying (fluctuating display) decorative symbols as identification information. The effect display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays a variable display of normal symbols (“◯” and “×” in this example) (“○” in this example). “X” is alternately displayed). In this embodiment, if “◯” is lit at the end of the variable display, it is a hit, and if “×” is lit, it is off. In the case of winning, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. The normal symbol hit probability is, for example, 12/13. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, there is provided a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of balls passed through the gate 32. Each time the gate 32 passes, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a plurality of winning holes (ordinary winning holes) 38 and 39 are provided, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 38 and 39 is detected by the winning hole switches 38a and 39a, respectively. . Each winning opening 38, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening 13 also constitutes a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning, and a winning area is also provided inside the large winning opening. When a game ball wins a winning area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as a prize (prize ball).

  Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7, and there is an out port 26 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize at the bottom.

  Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the like) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  In this example, a prize ball LED 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. It has been. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through the ball striking rail, and then falls in the game area 7. When the hit ball enters the start winning opening 13 and is detected by the start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts variable display on the special symbol display 8, and the effect display device 9 The decorative pattern starts variable display. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of special symbols (“00” to “99”) on the special symbol display 8 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, the left and right symbols such as “33”, “77”, etc. are the same), the state shifts to a start operation state or a big hit game state.

  Next, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the variable winning device 20 has a mounting board 21 for mounting the variable winning ball device 20 on the surface of the game board 1, and the upper winning space 22 a is formed in the mounting board 21. . In the upper winning space 22a, a pair of left and right opening / closing pieces 23a and 23b are rotatably provided. The open / close pieces 23a and 23b are connected to the solenoids 24a and 24b via link mechanisms, respectively, and rotate in a direction to open the upper winning space 22a when the solenoids 24a and 24b are turned on. When the solenoids 24a and 24b are turned off, the upper winning space 22a is rotated in the closing direction. FIG. 3 shows the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a state where the upper winning space 22a is opened. When the upper prize space 22a is opened, the game ball can enter the variable prize ball apparatus 20, and when the upper prize space 22a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the variable prize ball apparatus 20. It becomes a state.

  A game ball that has entered the upper prize space 22a passes through one of the ball paths 33a and 33b provided on the left and right sides of the winning combination prize switch 34a and the prize winning switch 34b provided in the ball paths 33a and 33b. After being detected by either one, it is guided toward the center of the upper winning space 22a.

  In the bottom wall portion of the upper prize space 22a, a guide hole for guiding a game ball won in the upper prize space 22a to the lower prize space 22b is provided so as to be opened and closed. The guide hole is opened and closed, for example, by turning on / off a solenoid. The game ball dropped from the guide hole is sent to the lower winning space 22b from the lower entrances 27a and 27b through a ball passage (not shown) provided inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  The game balls sent from the lower entrances 27 a and 27 b to the lower prize space 22 b roll toward the front of the gaming machine 1. A specific winning opening (specific area) 30 and non-specific openings 29A and 29B are provided below the rolling downstream end. A game ball won in the specific winning opening 30 is detected by the special region switch (V winning switch) 30a and then also detected by the accessory discharge switch 29a. A game ball that has not won the specific winning opening 30 flows into one of the non-specific openings 29A and 29B and is detected by the accessory discharge switch 29a. That is, the game balls that have flowed into the specific winning port 30 or the non-specific ports 29A and 29B, that is, the game balls that have won the variable winning ball device 20, are both guided to the discharge passage and the accessory discharge switch 29a provided in the discharge passage. Is detected. The fact that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 30 and is detected by the specific area switch 30a is also referred to as V winning.

  When the V winning is generated, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (the accessory) serving as a big winning opening is controlled to be opened and closed a predetermined number of times, that is, a predetermined number of rounds. This state is called a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, a high percentage is won, and a large number of game balls are paid out to the player.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that a winning occurs when a game ball is detected by the prize winning switch 34a, 34b. In other words, the area where the winning item winning switches 34a and 34b are provided corresponds to the winning area. However, a switch for detecting a game ball may be provided inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in addition to the prize winning switch 34a, 34b, and a winning may occur when the game ball is detected by the switch. For example, a switch may be provided for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the non-specific ports 29A and 29B, and a winning may occur when a game ball is detected by the switch or the specific area switch 30a.

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing the winning stage 120. In FIG. 4, (a) shows the configuration of the winning stage 120, and (b) shows a typical example of a path along which the game ball P rolls in the winning stage 120.

  Referring to FIG. 4A, the winning stage 120 has an arc shape when viewed from the front, and the third start winning opening 12 is formed in the center. A third start port switch 12 a is built in the lower portion of the third start winning port 12. As shown in (b), the winning stage 120 is provided with a passage 121 having such a width that the game ball P can roll from the left and right upper part toward the central part when viewed from the front. In the winning stage 120, the periphery of the third start winning opening 12 has a shape in which the passage 121 is raised upward. In the winning stage 120 configured as described above, when the game ball flows down on the winning stage 120, the game ball rolls on the winning stage 120 and wins the third start winning opening 12, or the third start. It falls downward without winning the winning opening 12. For example, as shown in (b), the game ball P rolling on the passage 121 enters the third start winning opening 12 through the passage 121 and is detected by the third start opening switch 12a as shown in the path r1. In some cases, it may be removed from the passage 121 and fall downward as indicated by a route r2. In this way, by providing a winning stage 120 in which the game ball can roll at the third start winning opening 12 and showing the player whether or not the game ball enters the third starting winning opening 12, Interest can be improved.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of how the gaming machine proceeds. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, when a game ball wins the start winning opening 13 and the detection signal of the start opening switch 13a is turned on, that is, when a start winning occurs, game control means for controlling the progress of the game. A lottery is executed. As a result of the lottery, if the big win or the loss is determined, the special symbol and the decorative symbol fluctuate (variably display). When the change is completed, when the big hit is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. In the big hit game state, the grand prize winning opening is controlled to be opened and closed 2 to 15 times (2 to 15 rounds, the opening allowance time of 1 round is 29 seconds). If it is determined to be out of play, the jackpot game is not executed. In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is determined by lottery or the like.

  When the semi-big hit is determined, the game control means controls the accessory to the open state and starts the starting operation. When the game ball wins an accessory in the starting operation state, and the game ball wins a specific winning opening 30 and is detected by the specific area switch 30a, a V winning is generated. When the V winning is generated, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The big hit state generated by the V winning after the semi-big hit state, and the big hit state that occurs immediately after the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are finished, the normal big hit (3 to 15 rounds), the small hit (2 rounds), There are four types of probability variation big hits (3 to 15 rounds) and sudden probability variation big hits (2 rounds). These will be described in detail later.

  The accessory is controlled to be opened only in the starting operation state and the big hit gaming state. Therefore, in a game state other than those states, the game ball does not win a prize. Therefore, when a winning is detected inside the bonus game in a gaming state other than those states, the winning is not a regular winning (abnormal winning). Therefore, in this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, a notification to that effect is made and a prize ball payout based on the winning is not performed. However, as a matter of course, a regular winning is not notified and a prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the game control means turns on the error prohibition flag when there is a possibility that a regular winning will occur, so as not to notify the abnormal winning. Control based on the error prohibition flag will be described later.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 7 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. In this embodiment, the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Further, detection signals from the specific area switch 30a, the gate switch 32a, the start opening switch 13a, the prize winning switch 34a, 34b, the prize discharging switch 29a, and the winning prize switch 38a, 39a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. An input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 outputs an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 15a for opening / closing the solenoid 15 and solenoids 24a, 24b for opening / closing the opening / closing pieces 23a, 23b in accordance with instructions from the game control microcomputer 560. Is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18, and a normal symbol hold memory display 41. Perform display control.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the effect display device 9, the lighting control of the lamp, and the control of the speaker 27 are performed.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 8, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 77A is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 8 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp (not shown) provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted between the effect control CPU 101, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 in two-way communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol or the like (including a decorative design and a background design) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56). After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit)) (S4), the RAM is made accessible. Set (S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (S10 to S15, including S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not in an on state, whether or not data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determining random number counter, a normal symbol determining buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storing buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball running out flag, a payout stop flag An initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the equal control state.

  Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command for initializing a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing). Is transmitted to the sub-board (S13). For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the production display device 9 displays a screen display for informing that the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized, that is, initialization notification. Do.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 executes a process according to the random number circuit setting program, thereby causing the random number circuit 503 to obtain a random R value (for example, updated in a range from 1 to 65535) as a random value for determining the big hit. Make settings for updating.

  In S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number refers to a random number used for determining a variation pattern. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. Further, in this embodiment, the initial value random number is a predetermined counter such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for determining a normal symbol). This is a random number used to determine the initial value of the count value. The initial value random number update process refers to a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number.

  A game control process for controlling the progress of the game described later (the game control microcomputer 560 is a game display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself. In the process controlled by the above, or the process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as a gaming device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol determination is one round (the random number for normal symbol determination) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, through the input driver circuit 58, the specific area switch 30a, the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the third start port switch 12a, the prize winning switch 34a, 34b, the accessory The detection signals of the discharge switch 29a and the winning opening switches 38a and 38b are input, and the state is determined (switch processing: S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S33 and S34. Execute.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when it detects that a game ball has won a prize at a time other than the regular time (S23: abnormal winning notification process).

  Next, processing for updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining jackpot symbols used for game control is performed (determination random number update processing: S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S25, S26).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine the detachment symbol (stop symbol) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for detachment symbol determination)
(2) Random 2: Determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when generating a big hit (for determining the big hit symbol)
(3) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5: Random 4 initial value is determined (for determining random 4 initial value)
In S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 10, the game control microcomputer 560 counts the counter for generating the jackpot symbol determining random number in (2) and the random symbol for determining per regular symbol in (4). Up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may make it use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(5). Further, in this embodiment, the random R which is a jackpot determination random number is a random number generated by the random number circuit 503 as hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560. Software random numbers generated based on a program by the control microcomputer 560 may be used.

  In this embodiment, the random numbers (particularly random 1, 2, 3) shown in FIG. 11 are used for both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. The random number related to the fluctuation may be different from the random number related to the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process (S27A). In the first special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag according to the gaming state. Further, the second special symbol process is performed (S27B). In the second special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, a normal symbol process is performed (S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 determines the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the third start port switch 12a, the accessory winning switch 34a, 34b, and the winning port switches 38a, 38b. Prize ball processing for setting and the like is executed (S31). Specifically, the winning is based on the fact that any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the third starting port switch 12a, the prize winning switch 34a, 34b and the winning port switches 38a, 38b is turned on. In response to the detection, a payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S32: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S33). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S34). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S35), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S34 (excluding S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state changes when the special symbol is changed based on the start winning in this embodiment. When a start win is generated, the CPU 56 performs a lottery process for determining whether or not to make a big hit or a semi-hit. If the lottery result is to generate a “hit”, the big win is not received in the big win game. Open and close 2-15 times (R indicates round). If the lottery result is to generate a “semi-hit”, a start operation is performed in which the big prize opening is opened and closed twice.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The big hit determination table is a determination of whether or not to make a big hit, a decision whether or not to make a big hit, and a hit determination value to be compared with a random R in order to determine the type of hit when making a big hit It is a set data table. The data of the big hit determination table is stored in the ROM 54. The hit judgment value includes the normal big hit judgment value, the probability variation big hit judgment value, the sudden probability variation big hit judgment value, the small hit judgment value, the normal quasi big hit judgment value, the probability quasi-big hit judgment value, the sudden probability variation quasi big hit judgment value, the quasi-small hit judgment Value and a discrepancy determination value are included. In the case of this embodiment, the big hit determination table is used to determine whether to make a big hit, whether to make a sub big hit, and the type of hit (normal big hit, probability variable big hit, sudden probability variable big hit, small hit) Used. The big hit determination table includes a first normal big hit determination table shown in FIG. 13 (a), a first positive change big hit determination table shown in FIG. 13 (b), and a second normal time shown in FIG. 13 (c). A jackpot determination table and a second probability variation jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 13D are included.

  In each of (a) to (d) of FIG. 13, the types of hits such as normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit, quasi-normal big hit, certain variation sub big hit, sudden probability variable sub big hit, and sub small hit The correspondence relationship between the types of hits and misses including the gaps, the numerical range of the determination values of the random R for selecting the types of the display results, and the number of determination values is shown.

  Next, the hit type will be described. In the present embodiment, the big game state and the small game state are included as specific game states that are advantageous to the player. The small win is a kind of big win, but in the case of the present embodiment, the special winning opening is opened for 3 rounds or more in a specific gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a small winning gaming state) in which the big winning opening is opened by the small hit. Since the big winning opening in the specific gaming state is different from the big hit made, it is distinguished as a small hit. However, in the case of a big hit when the big winning opening is opened with an upper limit of two rounds, the opening operation of the big winning opening in the specific gaming state is the same as in the small winning gaming state, but is controlled to a probable change state after the specific gaming state ends. Therefore, the name “big hit” is used to distinguish it from the small hits that are not controlled to the probable change state after the end of the specific gaming state.

  Probability big hit is the probability that the game state after big hit game is a big hit that shifts to a probable state where there is a high probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state (states other than the probability change state) Abbreviation for variation jackpot. For the probability variation jackpot, a jackpot gaming state that continues for three or more rounds, simply called “probability jackpot”, and a jackpot gaming state that ends in two rounds, called “suddenly odd jackpot”, are executed. Including. In the present embodiment, when simply called “probability jackpot”, it means a jackpot game in which a jackpot gaming state that continues for three or more rounds is executed, and when called “suddenly probability jackpot”, the jackpot ends in two rounds. Means. In addition, when the probability fluctuation big hit including both of these “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit” is shown, it is called “probability fluctuation big hit” in order to distinguish it from the aforementioned “probability big hit”. For each of such probable big hits and normal big hits, the number of rounds is larger than in the case of small hits and sudden probable big hits, for example, selected from a plurality of predetermined rounds of 3 to 15 rounds. It becomes a round.

  The small hit is a hit that is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the number of times of opening the big prize opening is allowed up to two times in the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the small hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state does not shift to the probability changing state. Suddenly promising big hit is, as mentioned above, a big hit in which the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is allowed in the big hit gaming state, but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the gaming state after the big hit game It is a big hit that shifts to a probable state. That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change probability big hit and the small hit have the same number of times of opening. Further, in this embodiment, the sudden probability change big hit and the small hit are the same in each round for the big winning opening opening allowable time (for example, 0.5 seconds as compared with 29 seconds in the case of the normal big hit and the probability big hit). It is.

  It should be noted that the sudden winning odds and small wins are not necessarily the same as the number of rounds of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state and the opening time of the big prize opening. It is only necessary that the number of times of opening and the opening time of the special winning opening are substantially the same. For example, it can be said that the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is substantially the same if the difference is about one time and the opening time of the big prize opening is a difference of about 5 seconds at the maximum. In addition, it is only necessary that the difference between the number of opening of the big winning opening and the opening time of the big winning opening is such that the player does not clearly feel the difference between the sudden change big hit and the small hit. However, the present invention is not limited to the above numerical values. In addition, the small win may be a specific gaming state in which the special winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, with a certain time (for example, a short time such as 1.8 seconds) as the upper limit of the opening time of the special winning opening. Good. In that case, the winning opening may be opened and closed many times (either open once or open multiple times) within a certain time.

  In the present embodiment, as the big hit gaming state of sudden probability change big hit, the number of rounds is smaller than in the case of normal big hit and probability variable big hit, and the big winning opening opening allowable time (for example, normal big hit and 29 seconds in the case of a probable big hit, 0.5 seconds) was shorter than in the case of the normal big hit and the probable big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a big hit game state of sudden probability change big hit, it is possible to reduce only the number of rounds or shorten only the allowance opening allowance time as compared with the case of normal big hit and probability variable big hit. Good. In other words, the jackpot gaming state of sudden probability variation jackpot is at least one of the number of rounds less than the case of the normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot, and at least one of the allowance opening time of each round shorter than the case of the normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot Any gaming state may be used.

  Next, as described above, the semi-hit game state is not a specific game state (hit state) only by the display result of the special symbol, but the special symbol becomes a predetermined display result and the variable winning ball apparatus 20 This is a game state in which a specific game state (a big hit state) is not reached until a game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 during the start operation (opened twice) and wins the specific winning port 30. After the semi-big hit game state, the specific game state (big hit state) generated by winning the game ball at the special winning opening 30 is also the same as described above, namely, normal big hit, small hit, probability variable big hit, and sudden probable big hit. There is. The CPU 56 determines in advance what kind of big hit will occur when a specific gaming state (big hit state) occurs after the semi-big hit gaming state, and the internal decision state is usually a semi-big hit, semi-small hit, probable change This is called a quasi-hit, suddenly probable quasi-hit.

  The first normal jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 13A is a table used for the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state (the gaming state that is not the probability variation state). The first probability variation jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 13B is a table used for the variation display of the first special symbol in the probability variation state. The second normal jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 13C is a table used for the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state. The second probability variation jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 13D is a table used for the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation state.

  In each of (a) to (d) of FIG. 13, the left column shows the determination value of random R and the number of determination values set for determining the jackpot determination and the display result of the special symbol. In the column, the types of hits that are selected corresponding to the value of random R in the left column (normal big hit, small hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, normal quasi big hit, normal sub big hit, semi-small hit, certain variation sub big hit, sudden probability variable big hit , And the type of display result of “displacement”). In other words, the value of random R is extracted at a predetermined timing, and the display result is selected from among the types of hits such as normal big hit, small hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, and outlier types according to the random R value. By selecting whether or not to make a hit-off type, it is possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit and to determine the selection of the hit type at the same time. In this way, instead of simultaneously determining whether or not to make a big hit and determining the selection of the type of hit, first, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, Only when the determination is made, the selection of the hit type may be made.

  In the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 13A to 13D, the tables (a) and (b) used for the first special symbol and the (c) and (d) used for the second special symbol. In this table, the data is set so that the probability that the probability variation jackpot that becomes a high probability state combining the probability variation jackpot and the sudden probability variation jackpot is selected has the same probability. The data is set so that the probability that the probability variation quasi-hit that becomes a high probability state of the probability variation quasi-hit and the sudden probability variation quasi-hit becomes the same probability is selected. For example, in the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the total number of determination values for selecting the probability variation big hit and the sudden probability variation big hit in the first normal jackpot determination table (a) used in the normal state is 60. It is a piece. On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol, the total number of determination values for selecting the probability variation jackpot and the sudden probability variation jackpot in the second normal jackpot determination table (c) used in the normal state. There are 60. In the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the total number of determination values for selecting the probability variation jackpot and the sudden probability variation jackpot in the first probability variation jackpot determination table (b) used when the probability variation state is 3100. It is a piece. On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol, the total number of determination values for selecting the probability variation jackpot and the sudden probability variation jackpot in the second probability variation jackpot determination table (d) used in the probability variation state. There are 310.

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the total number of determination values for selecting the probability variation sub-hit and the sudden probability variation sub-hit in the first normal time jackpot determination table (a) used in the normal state. There are 17914. On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol, the determination value for selecting the probability variation sub-hit and the sudden probability variation sub-hit in the second normal time jackpot determination table (c) used in the normal state. The total number is 17914. Further, in the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the total number of determination values for selecting the probability variation sub-hit and the sudden probability variation sub-hit in the first probability variation jackpot determination table of (b) used when the probability variation state is established. There are 19372. On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol, the determination value for selecting the probability variation sub-hit and the sudden probability variation sub-hit in the second probability variation jackpot determination table (d) used when the probability variation state is used. The total number is 19372.

  In the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 13A to 13D, when the probability change state is a high probability state, there is a probability of determining to control the jackpot gaming state of the sudden probability variation jackpot as the jackpot gaming state suddenly. The data is set so as to be lower than the probability in the normal state as the low probability state. In addition, when the probability change state as a high probability state, the probability of suddenly determining the jackpot gaming state to be a jackpot gaming state of sudden probability variation sub-hit is compared to the probability in the normal state as a low probability state Data is set so as to be low.

  For example, in the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting sudden probability variation jackpots in the first probability variation jackpot determination table (b) used when the probability variation state is 20 is 20. On the other hand, the number of determination values for selecting the sudden probability variation big hit in the first normal big hit determination table (a) used in the normal state is 30. In the jackpot judgment table used for the second special symbol, the number of judgment values for selecting suddenly odd jackpots in the second jackpot judgment table of (d) used in the probability variation state is 10 The number of determination values for selecting suddenly probable big hits in the second normal big hit determination table (c) used in the normal state is 20.

  Further, in the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting the sudden probability variation jackpot in the first probability variation jackpot determination table (b) used in the probability variation state is 11,577. On the other hand, the number of determination values for selecting suddenly probable variable sub-hit in the first normal big-hit determination table (a) used in the normal state is 1,018. In the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting suddenly probable quasi-big hits in the second probability variation jackpot determination table (d) used in the probability variation state is 5577. On the other hand, the number of determination values for selecting the sudden probability variable sub-hit in the second normal-time big hit determination table (c) used in the normal state is 6119.

  In the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, when the probability variation state is a high probability state, the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of sudden probability variation jackpot and sudden probability variation jackpot. An example is shown in which data is set so that the probability of determining to perform is lower than the probability in the normal state as the low probability state. However, not limited to this, the probability of determining to control to the big hit gaming state of sudden probability change big hit and sudden probability change big hit in the normal state as the high probability state and the normal state as the low probability state seems to be the same. It may be.

  Further, in the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 13A to 13D, when the probability variation state as the high probability state is set, the probability of determining to control the jackpot gaming state as the jackpot gaming state is low. Data is set so as to be lower than the probability in the normal state as the probability state. In addition, when the probability change state as a high probability state, the probability of determining to control to the semi-small game state as a big hit gaming state is lower than the probability in the normal state as a low probability state Data is set.

  For example, in the big hit determination table used for the first special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting the small hit is 30 in the first positive change big hit determination table (b) used when the probability change state is used. On the other hand, the number of determination values for selecting a small hit in the first normal big hit determination table (a) used in the normal state is 40. In the big hit determination table used for the second special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting the small hit in the second positive change big hit determination table of (d) used in the probability variation state is 10, The number of determination values for selecting a small hit in the second normal big hit determination table (c) used in the normal state is 20. In addition, the number of determination values for selecting semi-small hits in the first positive change big hit determination table of (b) used in the probability changing state is 12396, whereas it is used in the normal state ( The number of determination values for selecting semi-small hits in the first normal big hit determination table of a) is 14744. In the big hit determination table used for the second special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting the semi-small hit is 3560 in the second positive change big hit determination table (d) used when the probability change state is used. The number of determination values for selecting semi-small hits in the second normal big hit determination table (c) used in the normal state is 5898.

  Therefore, when in the high probability state, the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is executed based on winning in the second starting area where the game ball is easier to win than in the normal state. Since the probability of deciding to control suddenly the probability variation big hit is reduced, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has a large number of rounds in the specific game state generated based on the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b. Therefore, it becomes easy to win a game ball that is more advantageous to the player.

  When the CPU 56 performs the variable display for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big hit determination table of any of FIGS. 13A to 13D according to the gaming state at that time. Select. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal time big hit determination table is selected. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the probability variation state, the first probability variation big hit determination table is selected. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the second normal big hit determination table is selected. Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the probability variation state, the second probability variation big hit determination table is selected. Then, using the selected jackpot determination table, the CPU 56 compares the value of random R, which is a count value extracted from the random number circuit 503, with each determination value at a predetermined timing. When the value of the random R coincides with any of the determination values of normal big hit, small hit, probability variation big hit, and sudden probability variation big hit, it is determined to be a specific gaming state (big hit or small hit). Further, when the value of the random R coincides with any of the determination values of the normal quasi-big hit, the quasi-small hit, the probability variation quasi-big hit, and the sudden probability variation quasi-big hit, the quasi-big hit state is determined. Then, the CPU 56 agrees when the value of the random R coincides with the judgment value of the normal big hit, the small hit, the probability variation big hit, the sudden probability variation big hit, the normal semi big hit, the semi-small hit, the probability variation sub big hit, or the sudden probability variable big hit. The winning type is selected and determined according to the determined value.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the type of the first special symbol and the type of the first special symbol that is lost. In this embodiment, according to the type of the hit loss determined by the big hit determination using the random R, as a variation display result of the first special symbol as a variation display result of the first special symbol, as a variation display result of the second special symbol The symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. The stop symbol that is the variable display result of the first special symbol is determined using the first special symbol table. The stop symbol that is the variation display result of the second special symbol is determined using the second special symbol table. Each data of the first special symbol table and the second special symbol table is stored in the ROM 54.

  In FIG. 14, (a) shows the first special symbol table, and (b) shows the second special symbol table.

  In the first special symbol table, the relationship between the first special symbol and the hit failure type is determined as follows. At the time of detachment, the display result of the first special symbol is randomly determined as any one of the five symbols “H”, “E”, “F”, “C”, and “co”. Specifically, the symbol is determined using the first off-set symbol table shown in FIG. In each of the normal jackpot and the probability jackpot, the display result of the first special symbol is randomly determined as one of the three symbols “1” to “3”. Specifically, the symbol is determined using the first jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. In each of the normal quasi big hit and the probability quasi big hit, the display result of the first special symbol is randomly determined as one of the three symbols “4” to “6”. Specifically, the symbol is determined using the first quasi-hit symbol table shown in FIG. In the case of sudden probability big hit, the display result of the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “7”. At the time of the small hit, the display result of the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “8”.

  In the second special symbol table, the relationship between the second special symbol and the hit failure type is determined as follows. At the time of detachment, the display result of the second special symbol is randomly determined as any one of the five symbols “H”, “E”, “F”, “C”, and “co”. Specifically, the symbol is determined using the second off-set symbol table shown in FIG. In each of the normal jackpot and the probability jackpot, the display result of the second special symbol is randomly determined as one of the three symbols “4” to “6”. Specifically, the symbol is determined using the second jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. In each of the normal semi-big hit and the probability semi-big hit, the display result of the second special symbol is randomly determined as one of the three symbols “1” to “3”. Specifically, the symbol is determined using the second quasi-hit symbol table shown in FIG. In the case of sudden probability big hit, the display result of the second special symbol is determined as the symbol “7”. At the small hit, the display result of the second special symbol is determined as the symbol “8”.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the first and second jackpot symbol tables, the first and second quasi-hit symbol tables, and the first and second missed symbol tables. In FIG. 15, (a) is a first jackpot symbol table, (b) is a second jackpot symbol table, (c) is a first quasi-hit symbol table, (d) is a second quasi-hit symbol table, (e). The first off symbol table is shown in FIG. 1, and the second off symbol table is shown in (f). The data of these tables is stored in the ROM 54.

  As shown in (a) and (b), each of the first jackpot symbol table, the first quasi-hit symbol table, the second jackpot symbol table, and the second quasi-hit symbol table has a random value of 2, The correspondence relationship between the stop symbol (big hit symbol), which is the symbol display result, and the number of big hit rounds is shown. The CPU 56 extracts the random 2 value at a predetermined timing when it is determined that the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit, the normal quasi big hit or the exact variation big hit is based on the extracted random R value, and the random 2 Depending on the value, the type of jackpot symbol to be stopped and the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is selected and determined.

  In the first big hit symbol table of (a), the first special symbol and the number of rounds are selected and determined as follows. When the value of random 2 is any of 0 to 2, the first special symbol is determined to be “1”, and the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds is determined to be three rounds. When the value of random 2 is any one of 3 to 5, the first special symbol is determined to be “2”, and the upper limit value of the number of big hits is determined to be five rounds. When the value of random 2 is any of 6 to 9, the first special symbol is determined to be “3”, and the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds is determined to be seven rounds.

  In the second big hit symbol table of (b), the second special symbol and the number of rounds are selected and determined as follows. When the value of random 2 is any of 0 to 2, the second special symbol is determined to be “4”, and the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds is determined to be nine rounds. When the value of random 2 is any of 3 to 5, the second special symbol is determined to be “5”, and the upper limit value of the number of big hits is determined to be 11 rounds. When the value of random 2 is any of 6 to 9, the first special symbol is determined to be “6”, and the upper limit value of the number of big hits is determined to be 15 rounds. In the case of the present embodiment, the stop symbol is determined without distinguishing between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit.

  In the first quasi-hit symbol table of (c), the first special symbol and the number of rounds are selected and determined as follows. When the value of random 2 is any of 0 to 2, the second special symbol is determined to be “4”, and the upper limit value of the number of rounds is determined to be three rounds. When the value of random 2 is any one of 3 to 5, the second special symbol is determined to be “5”, and the upper limit value of the number of big hits is determined to be five rounds. When the value of random 2 is any of 6 to 9, the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “6”, and the upper limit value of the number of big hits is determined as seven rounds. In the case of the present embodiment, the stop symbol is determined without distinguishing between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit.

  In the second quasi-hit symbol table in (d), the first special symbol and the number of rounds are selected and determined as follows. When the value of random 2 is any of 0 to 2, the first special symbol is determined to be “1”, and the upper limit value of the number of big hits is determined to be nine rounds. When the value of random 2 is any one of 3 to 5, the first special symbol is determined to be “2”, and the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds is determined to be 11 rounds. When the value of random 2 is any of 6 to 9, the first special symbol is determined to be “3”, and the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds is determined to be 15 rounds.

  In this way, the first special symbol and the second special symbol individually determine the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit, the normal quasi big hit, and the display result and the number of rounds for the probability variation sub big hit. In the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different symbols are a normal jackpot symbol, a probability variable jackpot symbol, a normal quasi jackpot symbol, and a probability variable quasi jackpot symbol. Thereby, a display aspect is rich in variety and the interest of a game improves. In addition, the number of rounds selected when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed to the normal jackpot symbol and the probability variable jackpot symbol, the normal quasi-hit symbol and the probability variable quasi-hit symbol, and the game contents are diversified. , The fun of gaming is improved.

  As shown in (e) and (f), in each of the first missed symbol table and the second missed symbol table, the correspondence between the value of random 1 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) that is the display result of the special symbol. The relationship is shown. When it is determined that the deviation is based on the extracted random R value, the CPU 56 extracts a random 2 value at a predetermined timing, and according to the random 2 value, displays the jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed. The type and the upper limit of the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state are selected and determined.

  In the first outlier symbol table of (e), the first special symbol is selected and determined as follows. When the value of random 1 is either 0 or 1, the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “H”. When the value of random 1 is either 2 or 3, the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “E”. When the value of random 1 is either 4 or 5, the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “F”. When the random 1 value is 6 or 7, the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “C”. When the value of random 1 is 8 or 9, the first special symbol is determined as the symbol “ko”.

  In the second outlier symbol table of (d), the second special symbol is selected and determined as follows. When the value of random 1 is either 0 or 1, the second special symbol is determined as the symbol “H”. When the value of random 1 is either 2 or 3, the second special symbol is determined as the symbol “E”. When the value of random 1 is either 4 or 5, the second special symbol is determined as the symbol “F”. When the random 1 value is 6 or 7, the second special symbol is determined as the symbol “C”. When the value of random 1 is 8 or 9, the second special symbol is determined as the symbol “ko”.

  In this way, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are individually shifted and determined. Thereby, a display aspect is rich in variety and the interest of a game improves.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in state when the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (combination) is controlled to the open state based on the semi-big hit. When the semi-big hit is generated, the bonus game is released. However, when a game ball is won in the specific winning opening 30 provided in the bonus game, a bonus game in which the bonus game is further released 2 to 15 times is executed. In other words, when a V prize is generated in the starting operation, the game shifts to a big hit game in which the big prize opening is opened and closed 2 to 15 times (R indicates a round).

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern (including variation time information) of a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and an effect symbol used in this embodiment. In FIG. 17, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command having a two-byte structure. The “variation time” indicates the variation time of special symbols (variation display period of identification information).

  “Normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern without a reach mode. “Normal fluctuation / shortening” is a fluctuation pattern without a reach mode and a fluctuation time shorter than “normal fluctuation”. “Normal reach” is a variation pattern that is accompanied by a reach mode but whose display result (stop symbol) does not become a big hit symbol. “Reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”. When the reach mode is different, a change mode (speed, rotation direction, etc.), a character image, or the like of a different mode appears in the effect display device 9 during the reach change time (a period during which the reach effect is performed), or the effect display device 9 The background design is different. For example, in “normal reach”, the reach mode is realized by only one type of change mode, whereas in “reach A”, a reach mode including a plurality of change modes with different change speeds and change directions is realized. Further, “reach A / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach A”, but reach variation time is shorter than “reach A”. “Reach A / Extension” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “Reach A”, but the reach variation time is longer than “Reach A”.

  “Reach B” is a fluctuation pattern having a reach mode different from “Normal reach” and “Reach A”. Further, “reach B / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach B”, but the reach variation time is shorter than “reach B”. “Reach B / extension” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach B”, but reach variation time is longer than “reach B”. “Reach C” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, and “reach B”. “Reach C / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach C”, but reach variation time is shorter than “reach C”.

  “Super reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach mode different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, and “reach C”. is there. “Super reach B” is a variation pattern having a reach mode different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, “reach C” and “super reach A”. This is a variation pattern. “Reach A / Accuracy” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “Normal reach”, “Reach A”, “Reach B”, “Reach C”, “Super reach A” and “Super reach B”. It should be noted that the reach form of “reach A / accuracy” is a reach form similar to “reach A”.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 is “reach A / shortening”, “reach A”, “reach B / shortening”, “reach B”, “reach C / shortening”. ", Reach C", "Super Reach A" or "Super Reach B". Further, in the case of a probable big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 is “reach A / extension”, “reach B / extension”, “reach C / shortening”, “reach C”, “super reach A” or “ Select "Super Reach B". In case of sudden big odds, select “Reach A / Random”.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern selected only in the case of a normal big hit or a normal semi big hit, a fluctuation pattern selected only in the case of a probable big hit or a probable sub big hit, and a normal big hit. There are fluctuation patterns that can be selected at the time of probability variation jackpot, normal quasi-big hit, and probability variation quasi-big hit. In addition, there is a variation pattern of “reach A / surprise” selected in the case of sudden probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation semi-big hit, small hit or semi-small hit.

  In the short-time state, the fluctuation patterns of “normal fluctuation / shortening”, “reach A / shortening”, “reach B / shortening”, and “reach C / shortening” are selected. In the non-time-short state, other variation patterns are selected. However, the variation pattern of “reach A / accuracy” is used in both the short-time state and the non-short-time state. A variation pattern in which the variation display time is selected in such a short time state and shorter than the normal variation pattern (variation pattern of normal variation, reach A, reach B, and reach C) is a shortened variation pattern. Called.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs and the big hit game is finished, the game state is in a short time state until the execution of 10 special symbol variations (variable display) is completed. In addition, when it is decided to change to the probable state when starting the variable display of the special symbol when the big hit game is started when the variable display is finished, the game state is changed to the probable state when the big hit game is ended. Migrated. If the gaming state at that time is a probability variation state, the probability variation state is continued.

  After the transition to the probability changing state, the state of the probability changing state is short and the time is shortened until the execution of the variation of the special symbol 10 times (variation display) is completed. In addition, in the non-probability change state after the big hit game is over, the game state is changed to the normal state (the game state that is not the probability change state and not the short-time state) when the execution of 10 special symbol changes (change display) is completed. Transition.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the normal state that is not in the probabilistic state and not in the time-short state, the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (the total pending memory number described later) is a predetermined number (for example, 3)), the fluctuation pattern selected in the short-time state such as “normal fluctuation / shortening”, “reach A / shortening”, “reach B / shortening”, and “reach C / shortening”. The variation pattern of the shortened variation with the short variation display time is selected. Control in which the variation pattern of the shortening variation is selected when the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number is called retained memory variation shortening control.

  Next, a variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern shown in FIG. 17 will be described. The variation pattern table is a data table in which the correspondence between the random 3 value and the variation pattern is shown in order to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. The data of the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 54. The variation pattern table includes a plurality of types of tables such as a loss variation pattern table, a normal jackpot variation pattern table, a probability variation jackpot variation pattern table, and a sudden probability variation jackpot variation pattern table. These variation pattern tables further include a plurality of types of tables.

  The CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 at a predetermined timing when executing the variable display for the variable display of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and based on the random R for the variable display to be executed. Based on the information on the determined display result and information on whether or not the variable display time is shortened by the time-short state control or the hold memory fluctuation shortening control (as will be described later, the variable display is A determination is also made in addition to the information on which start prize is based on the first to third start prizes), and the variation pattern table is selected. Then, using the selected variation pattern table, a variation pattern corresponding to a random value of 3 is selected and determined.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern table. The deviation variation pattern table is a data table used when selecting a variation pattern when the variation display result is the deviation display result. The deviation fluctuation pattern table includes a deviation fluctuation pattern table A shown in (a), a deviation fluctuation pattern table B shown in (b), a deviation reduction fluctuation pattern table A shown in (c), and a loss reduction shown in (d). A variation pattern table B is included.

  Each of (a) to (d) of FIG. 18 shows a correspondence relationship between a variation pattern to be selected and a numerical range of random 3 determination values for selecting each variation pattern. The CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 at a predetermined timing when executing the variable display for the variable display of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and determines the variable display to be executed based on the random R. Information on the displayed result, information on whether or not the variable display time is shortened by the control of the short time state or the control for shortening the stored memory variation, and which start of the first to third start winnings the variable display is Based on the information indicating whether the winning is based or not, one of the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 18A to 18D is selected. Then, using the selected variation pattern table, a variation pattern corresponding to a random value of 3 is selected and determined.

  The deviation variation pattern table A shown in (a) of FIG. 18 is a state in which the display result of the variation display performed based on each of the first start prize and the second start prize is lost, and the variation display time is shortened. This table is used when not. The deviation variation pattern table B shown in (b) of FIG. 18 is a table used when the display result of the variation display performed based on the above-mentioned third start winning is out of place and the variation display time is not shortened. It is.

  In the loss reduction variation pattern table A shown in (c) of FIG. 18, the display result is lost for the variation display performed based on each of the first start winning and the second starting winning, and the variation display time is shortened. It is a table used when it is in a state. The deviation shortening variation pattern table B shown in (d) of FIG. 18 is used when the display result of the variation display performed based on the above-mentioned third start winning is lost and the variation display time is shortened. It is a table.

  In the deviation variation pattern table A in (a), “normal variation” is selected when the random 3 value is 0 to 119, and “normal reach” is selected when the random 3 value is 120 to 149. Select. In the deviation variation pattern table B in (b), “normal reach” is selected when the value of random 3 is any of 0 to 149, that is, whatever value of random 3 is. In the loss shortening variation pattern table A in (c), “normal variation / shortening” is selected when the value of random 3 is 0 to 119, and when the value of random 3 is any of 120 to 149. Select “Normal reach”. In the loss shortening variation pattern table B in (d), “normal reach” is selected when the value of random 3 is any of 0 to 149, that is, whatever value of random 3 is.

  As described above, when the variation display is performed based on each of the first start prize and the second start prize, when the deviation is selected, a variation pattern that is not reach and a variation pattern that is not reach are selected. However, only the variation pattern that will be reached is selected for the variation display based on the third start winning prize.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal big hit / semi big hit variation pattern table. The normal big hit / semi-big hit fluctuation pattern table is a data table used when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the result of fluctuation display is a normal big hit or a normal semi big hit display result. The normal big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table includes a normal big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table shown in (a) and a normal big hit / sub-big hit reduction pattern table shown in (b).

  Each of (a) and (b) of FIG. 19 shows a correspondence relationship between a variation pattern to be selected and a numerical range of random 3 determination values for selecting each variation pattern. When the CPU 56 executes the variable display for each of the variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the CPU 56 displays the display result information determined based on the random R for the variable display to be executed, and the control of the time reduction state. Alternatively, the variation pattern table of any one of (a) to (d) of FIG. 19 is selected based on the information indicating whether or not the variation display time is shortened by the pending storage variation shortening control. Then, using the selected variation pattern table, the variation pattern corresponding to the random 3 value extracted as described above is selected and determined.

  In the normal big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 19 (a), the display result is the normal big hit or the normal semi big hit for the variable display performed based on each of the first start prize to the third start prize. This table is used when the variable display time is not shortened. In the normal big hit / semi-big hit hourly short time variation pattern table shown in FIG. 19B, the display result is the normal big hit or the normal semi big hit for the fluctuation display performed based on each of the first start prize to the third start prize. It is a table used when it is in the state which shortens a variable display time.

  In the normal big hit / semi big hit fluctuation pattern table of (a), the fluctuation pattern is selected as follows. “Reach A” is selected when the value of random 3 is any of 0-59. When the value of random 3 is 60 to 69, “reach A / extension” is selected. “Reach B” is selected when the value of random 3 is between 70 and 109. “Reach C” is selected when the value of random 3 is 110 to 139. When the value of random 3 is any of 140 to 149, “Super Reach A” is selected. In the normal big hit shortening variation pattern table of (b), the variation pattern is selected as follows. When the value of random 3 is 0 to 59, “reach A / shortening” is selected. When the value of random 3 is 60 to 109, “reach B / shortening” is selected. When the value of random 3 is 110 to 149, “reach C / shortening” is selected.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table. The probability variation jackpot / semi-big hit variation pattern table is a data table used when selecting a variation pattern when the variation display result is a probability variation jackpot or a probability variation sub-hit display result. The probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table includes a probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table shown in (a) and a probability variation big hit / semi-big hit reduction variation pattern table shown in (b).

  Each of (a) and (b) of FIG. 20 shows the correspondence between the variation pattern to be selected and the numerical range of the random 3 decision values for selecting each variation pattern. When the CPU 56 executes the variable display for each of the variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the CPU 56 displays the display result information determined based on the random R for the variable display to be executed, and the control of the time reduction state. Alternatively, the variation pattern table of any one of (a) to (d) of FIG. 20 is selected based on the information indicating whether or not the variation display time is shortened by the hold memory variation shortening control. Then, using the selected variation pattern table, the variation pattern corresponding to the random 3 value extracted as described above is selected and determined.

  The probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 20A is a probability variation big hit for the variation display performed based on each of the first start winning prize to the third starting winning prize, and shortens the variation display time. It is a table used when it is not in a state to perform. The probability variation big hit / semi-big hit hourly variation pattern table shown in (b) of FIG. 20 shows the variation display time for the variation display performed based on each of the first start prize to the third start prize, and the variation display time is shown. It is a table used when it is in the state to shorten.

  In the probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table of (a), the variation pattern is selected as follows. “Reach C” is selected when the value of random 3 is any of 0 to 39. When the value of random 3 is any of 40 to 89, “Super Reach A” is selected. When the value of random 3 is any of 90 to 149, “super reach B” is selected. In the probability variation big hit / semi-big hit shortening variation pattern table of (b), when the value of random 3 is any of 0 to 149, that is, whatever value of random 3 becomes, select “reach C / shortening” To do.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a sudden probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table. The sudden probability variation jackpot / semi-big hit variation pattern table is for the variation display performed based on each of the first start winning prize to the third starting winning prize, when the variation display results in the sudden probability varying big hit or the sudden probability varying sub jackpot display result. It is a data table used when selecting a fluctuation pattern. The sudden probability variation big hit / semi big hit variation pattern table is a data table that is also used when a variation pattern is selected when the result of variation display is a small hit or semi-small hit display result.

  FIG. 21 shows the correspondence between the variation pattern to be selected and the numerical range of the random 3 decision values for selecting each variation pattern. The CPU 56 uses the sudden probability variation big hit / semi big hit variation pattern table to extract the random 3 extracted as described above when the variable display is executed for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variation pattern corresponding to the value of is selected and determined.

  In the sudden probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table, when the value of random 3 is any of 0 to 149, that is, whatever value of random 3 is, “reach A · surprise” is selected.

  As described above, when a deviation occurs, with respect to the fluctuation display performed based on each of the first start prize and the second start prize, a fluctuation pattern that is not reach and a fluctuation pattern that is not reach are selected. Although there are times when it is done, only the fluctuation pattern that becomes the reach is selected for the fluctuation display performed based on the third start winning prize. In addition, when a big win is obtained, only the variation pattern that reaches the reach is selected regardless of the variation display by any of the first to third start winnings. Accordingly, since the variable display performed based on the third start winning is always performed in a variable pattern that reaches in all cases, when the variable display is performed based on the third start winning, the big hit It is possible to improve the player's expectation for.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the same table is used as the variation pattern table used to select variation patterns for suddenly probable big hits and small hits. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern for sudden probability variation big hit and small hit may be provided individually. In that case, when multiple variation patterns that can be selected are provided and the variation pattern selection ratio for each variation pattern is selected when the variation pattern for sudden probability variation big hit is selected and when the variation pattern for small hit is selected It may be slightly different from the variation pattern table used in the above.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by using eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the capture of effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means, for example, in the first byte and the second byte of the effect control command data, respectively. Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 24, commands 8001 (H) to 800 E (H) are a variation pattern of decorative symbols and effect symbols that are variably displayed on the decorative symbol display and the effect display device 9 in response to the special symbol variation display. Is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8001 (H) to 800E (H), the decorative design display and the production display device 9 start to display the variation of the decorative design and the production design. Control.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C09 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit or semi-big hit, and the type of the big hit game. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the decorative symbols and the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C09 (H), so that the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C09 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the display of the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed after the variation display (variation) of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol is terminated. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the variation display (variation) of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized. Send a command to specify.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A004 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation commands include jackpot start 1 designation to jackpot start designation 4 designation commands depending on the type of jackpot. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game, and also specifies an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. The command C20 (H) is an effect control command (third dynamic winning designation command) that designates that there has been a third dynamic winning prize. The first start prize designation command, the second start prize designation command, and the third start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C3XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C3XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. Command C400 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that 1 is added to the total pending storage number.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to this. The total pending storage number after subtraction may be specified by a total pending storage number designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number without using.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning. The command D002 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal discharge in which the game ball won in the variable winning ball device 20 is not discharged within a predetermined time.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 24, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted as the variation display of the identification information and the second variation display unit (second decoration symbol display) on the first variation display unit (first decoration symbol display 9a). Game control when the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to control the first variation display portion and the second variation display portion in common with the variation display of the identification information in the device 9b). It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the production microcomputer 560 to the production control microcomputer 100. In addition, when controlling the effect parts such as the effect display device 9 that produces effects in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 100. It is possible to avoid increasing the types of commands that are executed.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command.
FIG. 25A shows an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command when a start prize (first start prize, second start prize, or third start prize) occurs. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start prize designation command (or the second start prize designation command or the third start prize designation command) when the start prize is generated, and then issues the total pending storage number designation command. Continue sending.

  FIG. 25B shows an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command when the variable display is performed. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a jackpot round number designation command immediately before the start of the variable display (before 2 msec). This jackpot round number designation command designates the upper limit number of round continuations of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 when a jackpot occurs. In accordance with the jackpot round number designation command, a notice of the jackpot round number which will be described later is notified. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command, a special symbol identification command, a display result identification command, and a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when the variation display is started. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Before transmitting the variation pattern command, a background designation command for designating a background image in the effect display device 9 according to the gaming state (for example, normal state / short time state / probability variation state) may be transmitted.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (S27A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the first special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special winning opening is executed.

  In the first special symbol process, if the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13 is turned on, that is, the first start winning is generated. Then, a first start port switch passage process is executed (S321, S322). Then, on the condition that the second special symbol is not fluctuating, not being a big hit game, not being a small hit game, and not being released (S323), any one of S300 to S312 is performed. Do. Whether the second special symbol is not changing, is not being a big hit game, is not being a small hit game, and is not being released, for example, is determined by the value of the second special symbol process flag.

The processes of S300 to S312 are as follows.
First special symbol normal process (S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. The game control microcomputer 560 confirms the first reserved memory number (first start winning memory number) when the first special symbol variation display can be started. The first reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. If the first reserved storage number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301.

  First variation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the first special symbol is determined. The variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from when the variation display is started until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation of the variation display of the first special symbol. Decide to be time. Also, a first variation time timer that measures the variation time of the first special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to S302.

  First display result specifying command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S304 (3 in this example).

  First reserved memory number transmission process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. Control is performed to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) according to S304.

  First special symbol changing process (S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the first variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the value of the first variation time timer becomes 0), the first special symbol display The fluctuation display in the device 8a is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. Also, the time for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the first special symbol (symbol stop time) is set in the first special symbol process timer. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. The effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and controls the first ornament symbol display unit 9a to stop the first ornament symbol, and also displays the effect. The device 9 is controlled so that the effect symbol is stopped.

  First special symbol stop process (S305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. When the symbol stop time set in the first special symbol changing process has elapsed, a flag setting status confirmation process is executed. When the big hit flag is set and the small hit flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to S305a. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (12 in this example). When the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Pre-release of the accessory (S305a): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. The game control microcomputer 560 executes a process for causing the start operation, and sets the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to the process of releasing the accessory (S305b). Update to (7 in this example).

  Processing for releasing an accessory (S305b): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. It is confirmed whether or not the specific area switch 30a is turned on and whether or not the accessory release time has elapsed. When the specific area switch 30a is turned on, the V winning flag is set. When the bonus release time has elapsed, the bonus is closed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the bonus post-closing process (S305c).

  Post-combination processing (S305c): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. If the value of the accessory release count counter is set to -1 and the value of the accessory release count counter is not 0, the accessory is opened to perform the starting operation again, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is used. The value is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the object opening process (S305b). If the value of the bonus release counter is 0, and the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is a value corresponding to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (SA306) ( In this example, it is updated to 9). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (SA300).

  First pre-opening opening process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 9. In the first big prize opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (10 in this example). The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round. However, when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game.

  First big prize opening opening process (S307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 10. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S306 (9 in this example). In addition, when all rounds have been completed (2R in the case of suddenly probable big hits and small hits, the number of rounds determined in S83b of FIG. 33 described later in the case of normal big hits and probable big hits), the internal state ( The first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (11 in this example). As a result, if all rounds are finished, the big hit ends.

  First big prize opening closing post-process (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 11. Processing is performed to confirm that all game balls have been discharged from the big prize opening. When all the game balls are discharged and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is a value corresponding to the first big winning opening release pre-processing (S306). Update to (9 in this example). When all the rounds are finished, the internal state is updated to a value (12 in this example) corresponding to the first big hit end process (S309).

  First big hit end processing (S309): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 12. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Also, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating the gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  First small hit pre-release process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 12. In the pre-opening process for the first small hit, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S311 (14 in this example). The first small hit pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first small hit pre-opening process is a process for starting the small hit game.

  First small hit release process (S311): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 14. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the small hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S310 (13 in this example). When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S312 (in this example, 15 (decimal number)).

  First small hit end processing (S312): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 15. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol process (S27B) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560. In the second special symbol process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 9a and the special winning opening is executed.

  In the second special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14, and the second start winning is generated, or When the third start opening switch 12a for detecting that the game ball has won the third start winning opening 12 is turned on and the third start winning is generated, the second start opening switch passing process is executed ( S521, S522). Then, on the condition that the first special symbol is not fluctuating, not being a big hit game, not being a big hit game, and not being in a bonus release (S523), any one of S500 to S512 is performed. Do. Whether the first special symbol is not fluctuating, not being a big hit game, and not being a small hit game is determined by the value of the first special symbol process flag, for example.

  The processing contents of the second special symbol normal process (S500) to the second small hit end process (S512) in the second special symbol process are the first special symbol normal process (S300) to the first special symbol process. This is the same as the processing content of the small hit end processing (S312). That is, in the description of the first special symbol normal process (S500) to the first small hit end process (S512) described above, the second special symbol process is performed by replacing "first" with "second". Will be explained.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of S322. In the first start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is 4 which is the upper limit value (S411). If the first pending storage number is 4, the process ends.

  If the first reserved memory number is not 4, the value of the first reserved memory number counter indicating the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (S412). Also, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1 (S413). In the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), data indicating "first start winning" is set in an area corresponding to the value of the combined reserved storage number counter (S414).

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). In FIG. 30, when the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3, the start prize is generated in the order of the first starting prize, the second starting prize, and the third starting prize, and the value of the total pending memory number counter is 4. , 5 and 6, the state of the reserved specific area is illustrated.

  In FIG. 30, as shown in FIG. 30A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. In such a reserved specific area, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the data indicating “first start prize” (“first” in the figure) indicates that the start prize has been received. According to the generated order (orders 1 to 8 in the figure), the order is stored so that it can be specified. In addition, in the reserved specific area, as shown in FIG. 30C, data indicating “second start prize” (“second” in the figure) is generated as a start prize by S425 described later. According to the order, the order is stored so that it can be specified.

  Further, in the reserved specific area, as shown in (d) of FIG. 30, data (“third” in the figure) indicating “third start winning” is obtained by S428, S429, and S432, which will be described later. An area where priority start data is used regardless of the order in which the start winnings are generated, and the data of the start winning data used for the next variable display is stored (from the viewpoint of the first starting winning prize and the second starting winning prize, the past (Corresponding to the area for storing the data of the start winnings generated in the above). However, when the data indicating the third start prize is already stored in the reserved specific area when the third start prize is generated, according to the order in which the start prizes are generated among the plurality of third start prizes. Remembered. That is, when the third start prize is generated, the third start prize data is preferentially used for the variable display with respect to the first start prize data and the second start prize data, but the same third start prize is used. Between the data, the data is used for the variable display according to the order in which the start winnings are generated.

  The data in the reserved specific area is read out from the area storing the data of the start winning data that has occurred in the past in order from the oldest, and it is confirmed which of the first starting winning prize, the second starting winning prize, and the third starting prize is received. (See S52 in FIG. 31 described later). Then, the confirmed oldest data is deleted, and the remaining data is shifted one by one (in the example shown in FIG. 30, it is shifted to the left). By the processing of S52 and S54, the variation of the special symbol is started for the start winning that has occurred in the past in the first start winning and the second starting winning, and in the first start winning to the third starting winning The special symbol variation is started with priority given to the third start winning prize. That is, in principle, the variation of the special symbol is started in the order of the start winning prize, and exceptionally, the variation of the special symbol is started with priority on the third starting prize.

  Further, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (counter value or the like for generating a big hit determination random number) and random R (big hit determination random number), and uses them as the extracted random number value as a first reserved memory number counter. The process of storing in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of is executed (S415). In the first reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. In S415, random values 1 to 3 (see FIG. 11) are extracted, and the random number R is extracted by reading the count value of the random number circuit 503.

  Then, control for transmitting the first start winning designation command is performed (S416). In addition, control for transmitting the total pending storage number designation command is performed (S417), and the process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process of S522. In the second start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 4 which is the upper limit value (S421). If the second reserved storage number is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the second reserved memory number is not 4, the value of the second reserved memory number counter indicating the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (S422). Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1 (S423). Then, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (S424). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, it is determined that the third start port switch 14a is turned on according to the erasing method, and the process proceeds to S427 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second start port switch 14a is ON, data indicating “second start winning” is set in the area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved specific area. (S425). For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), the data indicating “second start winning” (“second” in the figure) can be specified in accordance with the order in which the start winning occurs. Remembered.

  Further, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (counter values for generating big hit determination random numbers, etc.) and random R (big hit determination random numbers), and uses them as the extracted random number values for the second reserved memory number counter. A process of storing in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of is executed (S426). In the second reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number are secured. In S426, random values 1 to 3 (see FIG. 11) are extracted, and the random number R is extracted by reading the count value of the random number circuit 503.

  Then, control for transmitting the second start winning designation command is performed (S434). Further, control is performed to transmit the total pending storage number designation command (S435), and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S424 that the second start port switch 14a has not been turned on and the process proceeds to S427, it is a case where a third start prize has occurred. As shown below, a "third start prize" is set. Processing for setting the indicated data in the reserved specific area is performed. In S427, it is determined whether or not there is data indicating “first start prize” or data indicating “second start prize” in the hold specific area (S427). When it is determined that there is no such data, the process proceeds to S432 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is such data, each data is designated as a start prize for data indicating "first start prize" and "second start prize" in the reserved specific area. Are shifted one by one to the newer region in the order of occurrence (S428, shifted to the right in the example shown in FIG. 30).

  By such data shifting, the area where the data indicating “first start prize” or “second start prize” is set in the reserved specific area is the area where the oldest data is set. It becomes an empty area. Further, using the data after the shift of such data, the empty area is set with data indicating “first start prize” or “second start prize” after the shift in the reserved specific area. The area immediately before the area where the oldest data is set in the existing area is the empty area. For example, when only data indicating “first start prize” or “second start prize” is stored in the reserved specific area, the area where the oldest data is set in the reserved specific area is the empty area. On the other hand, when data indicating “third start prize” is stored in addition to the data indicating “first start prize” or “second start prize” in the hold specific area, “ An area in which data next to the area indicating data indicating “third start winning prize” is set becomes an empty area. In this way, data indicating the “third start winning” generated in this time is set in the empty area generated by the data shift (S429). That is, in the “first start prize” and the “second start prize” and the “third start prize”, the data indicating the “third start prize” in the reserved specific area in a manner in which the “third start prize” is given priority. Is set, and the data indicating “third start prize” is set in the reserved specific area with priority given to the “third start prize” which is generated earlier.

  Corresponding to the shift in the data in the reserved specific area, the data stored in each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer corresponding to each of the second reserved storage numbers (software random number and random R Data) is shifted and stored in each storage area corresponding to each of the second reserved storage numbers (S430). By such data shifting, in the storage area, the area where the oldest data in the area where data corresponding to the “first start prize” or “second start prize” is set is set. It becomes an empty area. In addition, the data after shifting of such data will be described. In the empty area, data corresponding to the “first start prize” or “second start prize” after the shift is set in the storage area. The area immediately before the area where the oldest data is set in the existing area is the empty area. Then, in response to the new “third start prize”, a software random number and random R are extracted, and a process of storing them in the empty area generated by the data shift is executed (S431).

  By performing the data shift in the reserved specific area and the data shift in the storage area, when there is data stored in the “first start prize” or “second start prize” reserved memory, When “3 start winning” is generated, as shown in FIG. 30D, the data indicating “third starting winning” (“third” in the figure) is the order in which the starting winning occurs. Regardless of the “first start prize” or “second start prize”, it is stored in the reserved specific area where the data of the most recently generated start prize is stored, correspondingly. In the same manner, the data extracted from the software random number and random R is stored in the storage area in the same manner in the manner that the priority is interrupted regardless of the order in which the start winnings are generated. Had It is stored in the presence area. In addition, as the priority order between the “third start prizes”, data is stored in the reserved specific area in the order in which the start prizes are generated.

  Then, control for transmitting the third start winning designation command is performed (S433A). Further, control is performed to transmit the total pending storage number designation command (S435), and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S 427 that there is no data indicating “first start prize” or “second start prize” in the hold specific area and the process proceeds to S 432, the hold storage specific information storage area ( In the reserved specific area), data indicating "third start winning" is set in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (S432). Then, a software random number and random R are extracted, and a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the second reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value is executed (S433). As a result, if there is no data indicating the “first start prize” or data indicating the “second start prize” in the reserved specific area, the “third start prize” is determined in the order in which the start prizes are generated. The indicated data is stored.

  Then, control for transmitting the third start winning designation command is performed (S433A). Further, control is performed to transmit the total pending storage number designation command (S435), and the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the priority order between the “third start prizes” is an example in which the variable display is given priority in the order in which the start prizes are generated (the stored storage in which the start prize has occurred first) First-in-first-out method used for variable display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the priority order of the “third start prizes” is preferentially displayed in the reverse order of the order in which the start prizes are generated (the stored memory in which the start prizes have occurred later). May be used first for the last-in-first-out method used for variable display.

  Also, between the first start prize to the first start prize port 13 and the second start prize to the second start prize port 14, the second start prize data is more than the first start prize data. You may make it use for a variable display preferentially. Specifically, the second start prize is also better than the first start prize with the same processing procedure as the process of giving priority to the third start prize as shown in S427 to s431 over the first start prize and the second start prize. A priority process may be provided.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a part of the first special symbol normal process (S300) in the first special symbol process and a part of the second special symbol normal process (S500) in the second special symbol process. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a part of the first special symbol normal process executed subsequent to the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 31, (a) shows a part of the first special symbol normal process, and (b) shows a part of the second special symbol normal process corresponding to the part (a). Also, FIG. 32 shows the continuation of the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 31A, but the continuation of the second special symbol normal process shown in FIG. Since it is similar to the first special symbol normal process, illustration is omitted, and FIG. 32 shows a process following the first special symbol normal process as a representative example of the process following the process of FIG.

  In the first special symbol normal process of FIG. 31A, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (S51). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the first reserved memory number is 0, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area (see FIG. 30) is the “first start prize”. (S52). If it is “first start prize”, the processing after S53 is performed.

  In S53, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Then, the content of the reserved specific area is shifted by one. In the example shown in FIG. 30, the shift is made to the left (S54).

  Next, the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (S55). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. Also, the value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (S56), and the process proceeds to S61 in FIG.

  As described above, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed every time the first data in the reserved specific area becomes the data of “first start prize”.

  In the second special symbol normal process of FIG. 31 (b), the CPU 56 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (S51a). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is 0, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 determines that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area (see FIG. 30) is “second start prize” or “third start prize”. (S52a). If it is not “second start prize” or “third start prize”, the process is terminated. If it is “second start prize” or “third start prize”, whether or not the first data among the data set in the hold specific area (see FIG. 30) corresponds to “second start prize” Confirm (S52b). When it corresponds to “second start winning”, a second start flag indicating that the variable display is performed based on the second start winning hold storage is set (S52c), and the process proceeds to S53a. On the other hand, when it does not correspond to the “second start winning”, a third start flag indicating that the variable display is performed based on the storage of the third start winning is set (S52d), and the process proceeds to S53a.

  In S53a, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Then, the content of the reserved specific area is shifted by one. In the example shown in FIG. 30, the shift is made to the left (S54a).

  Next, the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (S55a). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the second reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. Also, the value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (S56a), and the process proceeds to a step corresponding to S61 of FIG. 32 described later in the second special symbol normal process.

  As described above, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed every time the first data in the reserved specific area becomes the data of “second start prize” or “third start prize”.

  With regard to the first start prize and the second start prize by the processing of S52, S54 of (a) and S52a, S54a of (b), a special symbol for the start prize that occurred most in the past among these is given. Variation will begin. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started in the order of the start winning prize. As for the third start prize, when the start prize is generated, the priority order for executing the variable display is higher than that of the first start prize and the second start prize. Therefore, regardless of the order of the start prize, the first start prize and the second start prize are given. The variation of the special symbol variation will be started with priority over winning.

  In this embodiment, by performing the determination process in S52 and S52a, the special symbol variation display is started for the first start winning prize and the second starting winning prize in the order in which the starting winning prize is generated. The variable display may be started by giving priority to one of the start winnings and the second starting winning. For example, if the determination process of S52 and S52a is eliminated, the first special symbol process including the first special symbol normal process is executed prior to the second special symbol process including the second special symbol normal process ( 10), when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first reserved memory number is displayed until the first reserved memory number becomes 0. Prioritized execution.

  In S61, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a big hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area (S61). Then, the CPU 56 executes a big hit determination module (S62). The big hit determination module compares a predetermined determination value (see FIG. 13) with a big hit determination random number, and if they match, the big hit (ordinary big hit, probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit) or small hit is decided. It is a program that executes a process to be determined. Specifically, in S62, which of the following types is selected as normal hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit, normal quasi big hit, probability variable quasi hit, sudden probability variable quasi big hit, quasi small hit, and outage? To decide.

  Note that when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the CPU 56 uses the determination value in the first probability variation time table in which the determination values as shown in FIG. When it is (probable change state), the determination value in the first normal time determination table in which the determination value as shown in FIG. 13A is set is used. If it is decided to make a big hit (S63), the process proceeds to S81. Note that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a a big hit symbol. It is also to do.

  If it is determined not to be a big hit, the CPU 56 determines whether or not it is a semi-big hit (S63a). If it is determined that it is a semi-big hit, a semi-big hit flag is set (S63b), and the process proceeds to S82. If it is determined not to be a quasi-big hit, the CPU 56 reads out the symbol determining random number (random 1) from the random number buffer area (S64). Then, a stop symbol is determined on the basis of the random symbol for determining the off symbol using the first off symbol table of FIG. 15C (S65).

  Further, when the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set (S66), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (S67). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, a time reduction end flag is set in order to shift the gaming state to the non-time reduction state when the variable display is ended (S68, S69).

  Further, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S69a). The probability variation flag is a flag that is set in S161 when the probability variation big hit occurs and the big hit state is completed, and indicates that the probability variation state in which the occurrence probability of the big hit state and the semi-big hit state is improved Flag. If the probability variation flag is not set, the process proceeds to S89a. If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 subtracts and updates the probability variation counter by “1” (S69b). This probability variation counter counts down how many times the special symbol has changed in the probability variation state, and is set to “10” by S161a described later when the probability variation flag is set.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability variation count has become “0” (S69c). If it is not yet “0”, the process proceeds to S89a, but since the special symbol fluctuates 10 times and the process of S69b is executed 10 times during the probability variation state, the probability variation counter becomes “0”. At that stage, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation end flag (S69d). The probability variation end flag is a flag indicating that the probability variation state is terminated. If the probability variation end flag is set when the variable winning ball apparatus 20 finishes the starting operation, the probability variation flag is reset. (See SA453a to SA453c in FIG. 43). Thereafter, the control proceeds to S89a.

  In S81, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot symbol determining random number (random 2) is read from the random number buffer area (S82). Then, a stop symbol / round number determination process for determining a big hit symbol as a stop symbol and the number of rounds is executed based on the random number for determining the big hit symbol (S83). Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation jackpot flag if it is determined to be a probability variation jackpot (S84, S85). If it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit is suddenly set, the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (S86, S87). If it is determined to be a small hit, a small hit flag is set (S88, S89).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the semi-hit flag is set (S89a). If the semi-big hit flag is set, the process proceeds to S66. If the semi-big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (S301) (S90). When the probability variation big hit flag or the sudden probability variation big hit flag is set, the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state when the big hit game is finished.

  Even when a semi-big hit state is generated (in the case of YES in S63a), the process proceeds to S82 and after, and if necessary, the probability variable big hit flag, the sudden probability variable big hit flag, and the small hit flag are set. If no big hit actually occurs after the operation, these flags are reset at that stage (see SA461 in FIG. 43).

  In this embodiment, whether or not to make a big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number (see FIG. 13), but the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number. When a predetermined big hit symbol (predetermined probability variable big hit symbol or sudden probability variable big hit symbol) is determined based on the random number for determining the big hit symbol You may make it control to a probability change state.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the specific control contents of the stop symbol / round number determination process shown in S83 of FIG. First, the CPU 56 determines whether the big hit determined in S62 and S63 in FIG. 32 is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (S83a). In S62 of FIG. 32, when the big hit is made, it is determined whether the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit, the sudden probability variation big hit, or the small hit. If the determination result is a normal big hit or a probable big hit, a determination of YES is made in S83a, and the CPU 56 determines the first big hit symbol based on the big hit symbol determination random number (the value of the random 2 counter) in S83b. With reference to the table (see FIG. 15A), the first special symbol and the number of big hits are determined.

  For example, when the jackpot symbol determining random number is “4”, “2” is determined as the first special symbol and “5R” is determined as the jackpot round number. When the big hit symbol determining random number is “6”, for example, “3” is determined as the first big hit symbol and “7R” is determined as the big hit round number.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the determined big hit round number in the round number counter (S83g), and transmits a big hit round number designation command for designating the big hit round number to the effect control board 80 (S83h).

  On the other hand, if it is neither the normal big hit nor the probability variation big hit, the determination of NO is made in S83a, and the CPU 56 determines whether the big hit determined in S62 and S63 in FIG. Is determined (S83c). If neither the normal quasi-big hit nor the probability variation quasi-big hit (in the case of a loss), the CPU 56 determines the first special symbol in S83e from the first special symbol table (see FIG. 14A). Specifically, “7” is determined as the first special symbol in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, and “8” is determined as the first special symbol in the case of small hit. It should be noted that in the case of sudden probability big hit and small hit, the number of big hit rounds is uniformly set to “2R”, so there is no need to make a random decision using random numbers. Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the round number “2” in the round number counter (S83f). This round number counter is a counter for controlling the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened at the time of a big hit (see SA512 in FIG. 47).

  In the case of a normal semi-big hit or a probabilistic semi-big hit, a determination of YES is made in S83c, and the CPU 56 determines the first semi-big hit symbol table (FIG. 15 (c) based on the random number for determining the big hit symbol (random 2 counter value). )), The first special symbol and the number of big hits are determined.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (S301) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 reads a random 3 value, which is a variation pattern determining random number, from the random number buffer area (S450). Then, it is determined whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (S451).

  When it is determined that the time reduction flag is set, the process proceeds to S460 described later in order to select a shortening variation pattern. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the value of the total pending storage number counter is not less than a predetermined value (for example, 3 or more) (S452). When it is determined that the value of the total pending storage number counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to S460 described later in order to select a shortening variation pattern. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the total pending storage number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (S453).

  When it is determined in S453 that the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the variation pattern is determined based on the random 3 value read in S450 using the probability variation jackpot / quasi-hit variation pattern table in FIG. The selection is determined at random (S454), and the process proceeds to S467. On the other hand, when it is determined in S453 that the probability variation big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the small hit flag is suddenly set (S455).

  When it is determined in S455 that the sudden probability change big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation is made based on the value of random 3 read in S450 using the sudden probability change big hit / semi-big hit fluctuation pattern table of FIG. Select and determine pattern (In the case of this embodiment, there is one change pattern that can be selected, and the change pattern is selected and determined in a fixed manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (S456) and the process proceeds to S467. As described above, the variation pattern is determined by using the same variation pattern table for the sudden probability big hit and the small hit. On the other hand, when it is determined in S455 that the sudden probability change big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S457).

  When it is determined in S457 that the big hit flag is set, it is a case where it is determined that the normal big hit is determined by the erasing method. When it is determined in S457 that the big hit flag is set, the fluctuation pattern is selected and determined based on the random 3 value read in S450 using the normal big hit / semi-hit fluctuation pattern table of FIG. Then (S458), the process proceeds to S467. On the other hand, when it is determined in S457 that the big hit flag is not set, it is determined that it is determined that the big hit flag is not set in the erasing method. When it is determined in S457 that the big hit flag is not set, the fluctuation pattern is selected and determined based on the random 3 value read in S450 using the deviation fluctuation pattern table A of FIG. 18A (S459). ), Go to S467.

  In addition, when it is determined in S451 that the time reduction flag is set, and when it is determined that the value of the total pending storage number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is a time when a shortening variation pattern is selected. It is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S460).

  If it is determined in S460 that the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the variation pattern is determined based on the random 3 value read out in S450 using the probability variation jackpot / quasi-hit shortening variation pattern table in FIG. Are selected and determined at random (S461), and the process proceeds to S467. On the other hand, when it is determined in S460 that the probability variation big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the small hit flag is suddenly set (S462).

  If it is determined in S462 that the sudden probability variation big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the sudden probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table of FIG. 21 is used, and the fluctuation is determined based on the random 3 value read in S450. Select and determine pattern (In the case of this embodiment, there is one change pattern that can be selected, and the change pattern is selected and determined in a fixed manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (S463) and the process proceeds to S467. As described above, the variation pattern is determined by using the same variation pattern table for the sudden probability big hit and the small hit. On the other hand, when it is determined in S462 that the sudden probability big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S464).

  When it is determined in S464 that the big hit flag is set, it is a case where it is determined that the normal big hit is determined by the erasing method. When it is determined in S464 that the big hit flag is set, the fluctuation pattern is calculated based on the random 3 value read out in S450 using the normal big hit / semi-hit variable shortening motion pattern table of FIG. 19B. The selection is determined (S465), and the process proceeds to S467. On the other hand, when it is determined in S464 that the big hit flag has not been set, it is determined that it is determined that the big hit flag has been lost in the erasing method. When it is determined in S464 that the big hit flag is not set, the fluctuation pattern is selected and determined based on the random 3 value read in S450 using the loss reduction fluctuation pattern table A of FIG. The process proceeds to S466) and S467.

  In S467, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command (see FIG. 24) corresponding to the variation pattern selected in S454, S456, S458, S459, S461, S463, S465, or S466 to the effect control microcomputer 100. This is performed (S467). Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 uses the address of the command transmission table (previously set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. set. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  Further, control is performed to transmit a first symbol variation designation command indicating the variation of the first special symbol (S468). Then, the variation of the first special symbol is started (S469). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the first variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S470). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first display result specifying command transmission process (S302) (S471), and the process ends.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process (S501) in the second special symbol process. The process contents of the second variation pattern setting process are the same as those of the first variation pattern setting process described above except for some parts. Therefore, here, a duplicate description is avoided, and the difference between the second variation pattern setting process and the first variation pattern setting process will be described.

  The processing contents of the second variation pattern setting process are different from the first variation pattern setting process in that S456a to S456c are provided, S466a to S466c are provided, S466d is provided, and , S468a to S471a are performed instead of S468 to S471. Steps in which the processing contents of the second variation pattern setting process are the same as those in the first variation pattern setting process are assigned step numbers common to the first variation pattern setting process, and a duplicate description is avoided.

  In the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 performs the same processing as S450 to S458 in the first variation pattern setting process through S450 to S458. However, the processing of S450 to S458 in the second variation pattern setting process is executed for the variation display of the second special symbol.

  In the second variation pattern setting process, after the variation pattern is selected in S454, the process proceeds to S466d described later. In the second variation pattern setting process, when it is determined in S457 that the big hit flag is not set, the variation pattern is determined based on which of the second start flag and the third start flag described above is set. It is determined whether or not the variable display to be set is a variable display based on the second start winning prize hold memory (S459a).

  When it is determined that the display is a variation display based on the hold memory of the second start winning prize, there is a case where reach (normal reach) and a case where reach is not reached. Based on the random value of 3, the variation pattern is selected and determined (S459b), and the process proceeds to S466d. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display based on the hold memory of the second start winning is not made, that is, when it is determined that the display is the variable display based on the hold memory of the third start win, FIG. Using the deviation variation pattern table B of b), the variation pattern is selected and determined based on the random 3 value read in S450 (S459c), and the process proceeds to S466d.

  In the second variation pattern setting process, when it is determined in S464 that the big hit flag is not set, the variation pattern is determined based on which of the second start flag and the third start flag described above is set. It is determined whether or not the variable display to be set is a variable display based on the second start winning prize hold memory (S466a).

  When it is determined that the display is a variation display based on the hold memory of the second start winning prize, there is a case where the reach (normal reach) may or may not be reached, and the deviation shortening variation pattern table A in FIG. Based on the read random 3 value, a variation pattern is selected and determined (S466b), and the process proceeds to S466d. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display based on the hold memory of the second start winning is not made, that is, when it is determined that the display is the variable display based on the hold memory of the third start win, FIG. Using the deviation shortening variation pattern table B of d), the variation pattern is selected and determined based on the random 3 value read in S450 (S466c), and the process proceeds to S466d.

  In S466d, the second start flag or the third start flag set at that time is reset, and the process proceeds to S467.

  In the case of this embodiment, when the big hit and the small hit, the variation pattern that always reaches is selected for all of the first start win to the third start win by S454, S456, S458, S461, S463, and S465. The In the case of a loss, the first start prize and the second start prize are selected in S459, S466, S459b, and S466b, either the reach variation pattern or the non-reach variation pattern, and the third start For winning, a variation pattern that is always reachable is selected through S459c and S466c. Therefore, for the third start winning, unlike the variation display based on the first start winning and the second start winning, the variation display is performed with a variation pattern that always reaches when the variation display is performed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit when the third start prize is generated.

  After transmitting the variation pattern command in S467, control is performed to transmit a second symbol variation designation command indicating variation of the second special symbol (S468a). Then, the variation of the second special symbol is started (S469a). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the second variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S470a). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second display result specifying command transmission process (S502) (S471a), and the process ends.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first display result specifying command transmission process (S302). In the first display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs any one of the display control 1 designation display effect 5 designation display control commands (see FIG. 24) according to the determined type of jackpot (including the jackpot). ) Is transmitted. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag (which is also set when the small hit is determined) is set (S110). If it is not set, it is determined whether or not the semi-hit flag is set (S110a). If it is not set, control for transmitting a display result 1 designation command is performed (S111). When the big hit flag is set, if the probability variation big hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit the display result 4 designation command (S412 and S113). When the sudden probability big hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 5 designation command is performed (S114, S115). When the small hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 3 designation command is performed (S116, S117). When none of the probability variation big hit flag, sudden probability variation big hit flag, and small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (S118). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol changing process (S304) (S119).

  If the CPU 56 determines that the semi-hit flag is set in S110a, the CPU 56 proceeds to S112a in FIG. First, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set in S112a. When the probability variation jackpot flag is set, control for transmitting the display result 8 designation command is performed (S113a), and the process proceeds to S119a.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot probability change flag is not set, the CPU 56 suddenly determines whether or not the probability change jackpot flag is set (S114a), and if it is set, displays the display result 9 designation command. The transmission control is performed (S115a), and the process proceeds to S119a. If the sudden probability big hit flag is not set suddenly, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (S116a). If it is set, the display result 7 designation command is transmitted. Control is performed (S117a), and the process proceeds to S119a. If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 6 designation command (S118a), and proceeds to S119a.

  And CPU56 performs the process which updates a 1st special symbol process flag to the value (specifically "3") corresponding to a 1st reserved memory number transmission process (S303) by S119a.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first reserved memory number transmission process (S303) in the first special symbol process. In the first reserved memory number transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the combined reserved memory number subtraction command transmission request flag to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S101). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol changing process (S304) (S102).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (S304) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (S121), and checks whether the first variation time timer has timed out (S122). If the first variable time timer has not timed out (N in S122), the process is terminated as it is. When the first variation time timer has timed out (Y in S122), the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in S33 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator Control for deriving and displaying a stop symbol is performed in 8a (S123). Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S124). Then, the CPU 56 sets a symbol stop time in the first special symbol process timer (S125), and updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (S305) (S126). .

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process (S305) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the first special symbol process timer (S131), and checks whether the first special symbol process timer has timed out (S132). If the first special symbol process timer has not timed out (N in S132), the process is terminated. When the first special symbol process timer times out (Y in S132), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S133). If the big hit flag is not set (N in S133), the process proceeds to S133a.

  When the big hit flag is set (Y in S133), the CPU 56 initializes the value of the error number counter to “0” (S134). The error number counter is a counter for counting the number of abnormal winning detections, and will be described in detail later. Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command (S135). Specifically, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, a big hit start 3 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation big hit flag is suddenly set, a big hit start 4 designation command is transmitted. If it is set, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying that the big hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (S136). If the small hit flag is set, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first small hit release pre-processing (S309) (S137, S138). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening release pre-processing (S306) (S139). The case where the small hit flag is not set is a case where the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is determined.

  When determining that the big hit flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the semi big hit flag is set (S133a). If the semi-hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S146. If it is set, the CPU 56 sets a semi-hit display time timer (S133b) and uses the value of the first special symbol process flag. Processing to set a value (specifically, “6”) corresponding to the object pre-release processing (S305a) is performed (S133c), and the process proceeds to S146. The quasi-hit display time timer set in S133b is set to be shorter than the big-hit display time timer set in S136.

  In S146, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction end flag is set. If the time reduction end flag is not set, the process proceeds to S149. If the time reduction end flag is set, the time reduction end flag is reset (S147), and the time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is the time reduction state is reset (S148). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (S300) (S149).

  Note that the time reduction end flag is set in S69 in the first special symbol normal process. In addition, the gaming state shifts to a non-time saving state by resetting the time saving flag. At this stage, if the gaming state is a probability variation state, the gaming state becomes a probability variation state of a non-short-time state. On the other hand, if it is in the non-probable change state, it shifts to a normal state (a state that is not in the probabilistic change state and is not in the time-short state).

  In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, when the big hit display time timer is set, the CPU 56 performs control to open the big winning opening when the big winning display time timer times out, and the big winning opening opening time. The timer is set to a value corresponding to an open time (for example, 29 seconds for normal big hit and probability big hit, and 0.5 seconds for sudden big odds), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to the first value. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the big prize opening opening process (S307). The case where the big hit display time timer is set is the case before the start of the first round. When an interval timer (timer for determining the interval time between rounds) is set, when the interval timer times out, control is performed to open the big prize opening, and the opening time ( For example, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is set for a normal big hit and a probable big hit, and a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for a sudden big positive win, and the value of the first special symbol process flag is being opened. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the process (S307).

  In the first big prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 ends the final round when the big prize opening time timer times out or the number of winning balls to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). If not, the control for closing the special prize opening is performed, the value corresponding to the interval time is set in the interval timer, and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to the first big prize opening pre-processing (S306). Update to a value corresponding to. When the final round ends, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big hit end process (S308).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the accessory release pre-processing (SA305a).
In the pre-release process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the semi-big hit display time timer has expired (SA411a). This semi-big hit display time timer is the time timer set in S133b described above. At the stage where the quasi-big hit display time timer has not expired, the pre-release processing of the accessory immediately returns and no control is performed. When the semi-big hit display time timer ends, the process proceeds to SA411b, and the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set. If the probability variation flag is not set, the process proceeds to SA411, but if it is set, a process of setting 8 to the accessory release number counter is performed (SA411c), and the process proceeds to SA412. If the probability variation flag is not set, the accessory release number counter is set to “2” (SA411), and the variable winning ball apparatus 2 is opened twice as a starting operation, but the probability variation flag is being set. In other words, when the probability variation state is in progress, “8” is set in the accessory release number counter, and the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened eight times as a starting operation. As a result, a large number of game balls can easily enter the variable winning ball apparatus 20 during the starting operation, and the probability that the game balls will win the specific area 30 is increased accordingly, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit is improved.

  When the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets 2 in the accessory release number counter indicating the number of releases of the variable winning ball device 20 (the accessory) in the starting operation (SA411), and indicates the release time of the accessory. A value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 1 second) is set in the accessory opening time timer (SA412). Then, the accessory is opened (SA413). Specifically, the solenoids 24a and 24b connected to the open / close pieces 23a and 23b are driven to rotate the open / close pieces 23a and 23b in a direction to open the upper winning space 22a. Then, an error detection prohibition flag is set to prohibit detection of abnormal winning (SA414). Also, the in-function game ball number counter that counts the game balls that have entered the inside of the game is cleared (initialized to 0) (SA415), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the processing during the game release (SA306). It is updated to a value corresponding to (SA416).

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the processing for releasing an accessory (SA305b). In the process during opening of the accessory, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the accessory release time timer by 1 (SA421).

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (SA422). If time-out has occurred, the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 20) is controlled to be closed (SA429). Specifically, the open / close pieces 23a and 23b are rotated in a direction to close the upper winning space 22a. Then, a detection monitoring time that is a time for monitoring that the game ball that has entered the accessory is discharged from the accessory (the time for the game ball to reach the position of the accessory discharge switch 29a after winning the accessory) A value corresponding to the time (with a margin) is set in the discharge monitoring timer (SA430), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-close processing (SA307) (SA431).

  When the bonus release time timer has not timed out, when the bonus winning switch 34a or bonus winning switch 34b is turned on, that is, when a gaming ball that has entered the bonus is detected (SA423), the number of gaming balls in the bonus The counter value is incremented by 1 (SA424). When the accessory discharge switch 29a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the accessory is detected (SA425), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (SA426). In addition, an inflow switch that detects a game ball that has flowed into the non-specific ports 29A and 29B may be provided, and the number of discharged balls may be measured by the total number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 30a and the inflow switch.

  When the specific area switch 30a indicating that the game ball has entered the specific port 30 is turned on (SA427), the V winning flag is set (SA428).

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the post-completion processing (SA305c). In the post-completion processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the discharge monitoring timer by 1 (SA441). Then, it is checked whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out (SA442). When the discharge monitoring timer times out, the process proceeds to SA449.

  In SA449, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is zero. If it is confirmed in SA442 that the discharge monitoring timer has timed out, and it is confirmed that the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory is not 0, that is, all game balls are discharged from the variable winning ball device 20 (the accessory). If the discharge monitoring timer times out before being performed, control is performed to transmit a discharge abnormality designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (SA450). Thereafter, loop processing is executed.

  Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to a state where the game control process is not executed. That is, the progress of the game is stopped. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to stop the game.

  If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out, when the accessory discharge switch 29a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the accessory is detected (SA444), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1. (SA445). When the specific area switch 30a indicating that the game ball has flowed into the specific winning opening 30 is turned on (SA446), the V winning flag is set (SA447).

  If it is confirmed in SA449 that the value of the in-function game ball number counter is 0, the CPU 56 resets the error detection prohibition flag (SA451). Also, the value of the accessory release counter is decremented by 1 (SA452). If the value of the accessory release counter is not 0, the process proceeds to SA466 (SA453). When the value of the accessory release counter is 0, that is, when the opening in the starting operation has been completed twice, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change end flag is set (SA453a). This probability change end flag is set in S69d described above. If it is not set, the process proceeds to SA454. If it is set, the process proceeds to SA453b, the probability change end flag is reset, and SA453c is reset. After resetting the probability variation flag, the process proceeds to SA454.

  As a result, after the probable big hit and the big hit state are completed, the special symbol fluctuates 10 times, and at the stage when the variable winning ball device 20 finishes the starting operation, the probable change flag is reset and the probable change state ends.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (SA454). If the V winning flag is set, the V winning flag is reset (SA455). Also, the error counter value is initialized to 0 (SA457). The error number counter will be described later. In this embodiment, when it is confirmed that the specific area switch 30a is turned on and the V winning flag is set during the starting operation, the value of the error number counter is initialized. Alternatively, the value of the error number counter may be initialized, or the value of the error number counter may be initialized in the pre-winning pre-processing.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a command corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in S62 among the jackpot start 1 designation command to the jackpot start 4 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (SA458). Specifically, this control is the same as S112 to S118a described above.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (SA457a). If it is not set, the process proceeds to SA459. If it is set, the small hit display time timer is set. (SA457b). This small hit display time timer is set to a timer shorter than the big hit display time timer set in SA459 described later. Next, the special symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “14”) corresponding to the first small hit pre-release process (S311).

  Next, the jackpot display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) (SA459), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the first big prize. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the mouth opening pre-processing (SA308) (SA460). If the V winning flag is not set, the set of the semi-big hit flag, the probability change big hit flag, the sudden probability change flag, and the small win flag is reset (SA461), and the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to The value is updated according to the first special symbol normal process (SA300) (SA462).

  In SA466, the CPU 56 performs control for releasing the accessory again. That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 1 second is set in the accessory release time timer. Further, the accessory is controlled to be in an open state (SA467). Also, the in-function game ball number counter that counts the game balls that have entered the inside of the object is cleared (initialized to 0) (SA468), and the value of the special symbol process flag is processed during the function release (SA306). It is updated to a value according to (SA470).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process (SA306) for the first big prize opening. In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter (SA475). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero. Then, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is set in the accessory release time timer (SA476). Further, the special winning opening (community) is controlled to be open (SA477). Specifically, the solenoids 24a and 24b connected to the open / close pieces 23a and 23b are driven to rotate the open / close pieces 23a and 23b in a direction to open the upper winning space 22a. In addition, an error detection prohibition flag is set (SA478), the in-game game ball number counter that counts the game balls that have entered the prize winning opening (combination) is cleared (initialized to 0) (SA479), The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big prize opening opening process (SA307) (SA480).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening process (SA307). In the first big prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the accessory release time timer by 1 (SA481). If the value of the accessory release time timer is 0 (SA482), that is, if the accessory release time timer times out, the process proceeds to SA491.

  If the bonus release timer has not timed out, it is checked whether the value of the winning counter is 10 (SA483). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the process proceeds to SA491. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, when the winning combination winning switch 34a or the winning combination winning switch 34b is turned on, that is, when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected (SA484), the in-function game The value of the ball number counter is incremented by 1 (SA485), and the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (SA486). When the accessory discharge switch 29a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the big prize opening is detected (SA487), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (SA488). When the specific area switch 30a indicating that the game ball has flowed into the specific winning opening 30 is turned on (SA489), the V winning flag is set (SA490).

  In SA491, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the special winning opening (community) is controlled to be closed. In addition, a value corresponding to the detection monitoring time, which is the time for monitoring that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (community) is discharged from the special winning opening (community), is set in the discharge monitoring timer (SA492). . Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening closing post-process (SA308) (SA493).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening closing post-processing (SA308). In the process after the first big prize opening is closed, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the discharge monitoring timer by 1 (SA501). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out (SA502). When the discharge monitoring timer times out, the process proceeds to SA506.

  In SA506, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is zero. If it is confirmed in SA502 that the discharge monitoring timer has timed out, and it is confirmed that the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, that is, all the game balls from the variable winning ball device 20 (large winning mouth) If the discharge monitoring timer times out before being discharged, control is performed to send a discharge abnormality designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (SA507). Thereafter, loop processing is executed.

  Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to a state where the game control process is not executed. That is, the progress of the game is stopped. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to stop the game.

  If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out, when the accessory discharge switch 29a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the big prize opening is detected (SA503), the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory is set to -1. (SA504).

  If it is confirmed in SA506 that the value of the in-function game ball number counter is 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the round number counter by 1 (SA511). When the value of the round number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to SA513 (SA512). When the value of the round number counter is 0, that is, when all rounds in the jackpot game have ended, the error detection prohibition flag is reset (SA516), and the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the first symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (SA309) (SA517).

  In SA513, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set. If the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 56 proceeds to SA516 in order to end the big hit game. If the V winning flag is set, the V winning flag is reset (SA514), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening opening pre-processing (SA308) (SA515).

  In this embodiment, on the condition that the V winning flag is set, that is, on the condition that the game ball has won (V winning) in the specific winning opening 30 (one of the winning areas) Although it will move to the round, it is not necessary to be conditional on having won V. In that case, it is possible to always advance to the final round (2 to 15 rounds in this example), or to advance to a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds) regardless of whether or not the V prize is won.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (S309) in the first special symbol process. In the first jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to S154. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (S151), and the control for transmitting the big hit end designation command is performed (S152). Here, when the probability variation big hit flag or the sudden probability variation big hit flag is set, the big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted. When the probability variation big hit flag and the sudden probability variation big hit flag are not set, the big hit end 1 designation command is sent. Send. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (S153), and the processing is ended.

  In S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (S156), and the time reduction counter is set to 10 (S157).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the sudden probability variation big hit flag is set (S158). If the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation jackpot flag is set, the set flag (probability variation jackpot flag or sudden probability variation jackpot flag) is reset (S159). The probability variation flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state (S161). If the gaming state at that time is a probability variation state, the probability variation flag has already been set. Next, the CPU 56 sets 10 to the probability variation counter (S161a). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (S300) (S162).

  In the first pre-opening process in S311, the same process as the first big winning opening opening pre-process (S306) is performed. However, instead of updating the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first big prize opening opening process, the value is updated to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening process. Further, in the first small hit opening process of S310, the same process as the first big prize opening opening process (S307) is performed. However, if it is not the final round, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first small hit release pre-processing (S310), and if it is the final round (second round), the first special symbol process flag is updated. The value of the symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first small hit end processing (S312).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first small hitting end process (S312) in the first special symbol process. In the first small hitting end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hitting end display timer is set (S170). If the small hitting end display timer is set, the process proceeds to S174. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset (S171A, S171B), and control for transmitting the big hit end 1 designation command is performed (S172). Then, the small hit end display timer sets a value corresponding to a display time corresponding to a time during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) in the small hit end display timer ( S173), the process is terminated.

  In S174, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (S175). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (S300) (S176).

  Next, the normal symbol process (S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (CPU 56) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (S211), the CPU 56 executes a gate switch passage process (S212). Then, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in S200 to S203 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (S212): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

  Normal symbol normal process (S200): The CPU 56 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating S100, specifically, the normal symbol display unit). 10, when the normal symbol variation display is not performed, and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the open / close operation based on the normal symbol display 10 being hit and displayed, the gate passing storage is performed. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (S201).

  Normal symbol variation processing (S201): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 and causes the normal symbol process timer to detect the normal symbol process timer. Set the stop symbol display time and start the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (S202).

  Normal symbol stop process (S202): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S200). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state, and if it is a high base state, an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 15) in the high base state is selected. In the low base state, the release pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 15) in the low base state is selected, and the selected release pattern is set. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (S203).

  Normal electric accessory actuating process (S203): The CPU 56 is based on the condition that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out, and the number of game balls won in the normal electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 15) (second start) Executes a normal electric winning combination counting process for counting the number of winning prizes to the winning opening 14, and opens the normal electric winning combination with the set opening pattern (performs an opening / closing operation of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15). Execute normal electric accessory release pattern processing. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S200).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal process (S200). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (S221). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in S221), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in S221), the CPU 56 reads the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Store (S222). Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (S223). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the normal random number for symbol determination from the random number storage buffer (S224), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value (S225). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for normal symbol determination matches the hit determination value, and if there is a matching hit determination value, it is determined to be a hit. For example, when the time reduction flag is set, that is, in the high base state (time reduction state, probability variation state), the hit determination value is any one of 1 to 10, and in the low base state, the hit determination value is 3 or 7 It is said. If the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 10, the winning probability in the high base state is 10/11, and the winning probability in the low base state is 2/11. As described above, the hit is made with a high probability in the high base state, and the win is made only with a low probability in the low base state.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol change time in the normal symbol process timer (S226), and starts the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10 (S227). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the variation time of the normal symbol at the time of the low base is 30.0 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol at the time of the high base is 1.0 seconds. . Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (S201) (S228).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S201). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (S231). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in S231), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (S235).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (Y in S231), the CPU 56 stops the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10 (S232). Then, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer (S233). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (S202) (S234).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (S202). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (S241). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in S241), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (S242).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in S241), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (S225) (S243). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol can be confirmed, for example, by setting a normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in S225 and checking whether or not the flag is set. it can.

  When the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in S243), the CPU 56 sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (S244). The ordinary electric accessory operating time is the maximum time during which the ordinary electric accessory (ordinarily variable winning ball apparatus 15) can operate. The normal electric accessory operating time is set to be longer in the high base state than in the low base state.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the gaming state is a high base state or a low base state (S245). Whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state can be confirmed by checking whether or not the time reduction flag is set. When the time reduction flag is set, it can be determined that the high base state is set, and when the time reduction flag is not set, it can be determined that the low base state is set. In the high base state, a high base state flag indicating the high base state is set, and whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state is determined depending on whether or not the flag is set. You may do it.

  When in the high base state (Y in S245), the CPU 56 selects the opening pattern set in the high base time table shown in FIG. 54 as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (S246). On the other hand, when it is in the low base state (N in S245), the CPU 56 selects the opening pattern set in the low base time table shown in FIG. 54 as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (S247). In the example shown in FIG. 54, the low base time table is set with data of an open pattern in which the open time is 0.5 seconds and the number of open times is one. Also, in the high base time table, data of an opening pattern with an opening time of 2.5 seconds and an opening frequency of 2 is set.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the release pattern selected in S246 or S247 in the release pattern buffer (S248). When the opening pattern is set in the opening pattern buffer, the opening time (in this case, the normal variable winning ball device 15 in this case) is set to the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern timer (the timer for measuring the opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric accessory). A process of setting a closing time until the first opening is performed is also performed. Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (S203) (S249).

  In S243, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a missing symbol (N in S243), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal process (S200). (Specifically, “0”) (S250).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory actuating process (S203). In the normal electric actor operation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (S261). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in S261), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (S262).

  Then, the CPU 56 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (S263). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected.

  The CPU 56 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (corresponding bit of the second start port switch 14a) (S264). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14). If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in S264), the process proceeds to S268. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in S264), the second start port switch 14a is turned on, so the CPU 56 performs the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 15). 1 is added to the number of counters for the number of game balls that have won a prize (S265). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory winning number counter is less than 8 (S266). If the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is not less than 8 (N in S266), that is, if it is equal to or greater than 8, the CPU 56 clears the value of the normal symbol process timer (to 0) (S267). With this process, the ordinary electric accessory actuating process ends (see Y in S261, S272). As described above, in this embodiment, when eight or more game balls win the normal variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the normal electric accessory operating process is terminated. .

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (S268). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has expired (S269). If not timed out (N in S269), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in S269), the CPU 56 sets the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer (S270). Then, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 15a to open or close the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 15) (S271).

  Specifically, when the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, the release time is set as the open pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer, and the output port buffer The normal variable electric winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by inverting the solenoid output bit of the ordinary electric accessory of (solenoid buffer). When the normal electric accessory opening pattern timer expires when the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open, the closing time is set as the opening pattern time in the normal electric accessory opening pattern timer, and the output port buffer (solenoid buffer) The ordinary variable winning ball device 15 is closed by inverting the ordinary electric accessory solenoid output bit.

  By the processes in S268 to S271 described above, an open pattern in the low base state and an open pattern in the high base state are realized. When the gaming state is in the low base state, the opening time is 0.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is one, so that, for example, 1.0 seconds from the start of the normal electric accessory operation process When the closing time elapses, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 0.5 seconds has elapsed thereafter, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed and closed. Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, the release time is 2.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is two. When the closing time of 2 seconds elapses, the normally variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the normally variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. When the closing time of 2.5 seconds elapses again, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed and closed. It becomes a state.

  In S261, when the normal symbol process timer expires (Y in S261), the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S200). (S272).

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a game ball in the game control microcomputer. As shown in FIG. 56, the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 respectively include a third start port switch 12a, a second start port switch 14a, a winning port switch 39a, a winning port switch 40a, an accessory winning switch 34b, The detection signals of the prize winning switch 34a, the first start port switch 13a, and the gate switch 32a are input. The detection signal of the accessory discharge switch 29a is input to bit 6 of the input port 1. A detection signal from the specific area switch 30a is input to bit 7 of the input port 1. The input ports 0 and 1 are part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  Next, payout control commands (payout control signals) transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout control signal output from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer.

  The prize ball REQ signal is a signal that is in an output state (= ON state) when a prize ball number command is transmitted (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request). The award ball number signal is a signal (award ball number command) output for designating the number of game balls (0 to 15) for which a payout request is made.

  58 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the prize ball REQ signal and the 4-bit prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67 and to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. Entered. The output circuit 67 is installed outside the I / O port 57 shown in FIG. 3 on the main board 31 (not shown in FIG. 3). Further, on the payout control board 37, an output circuit 67 is provided in the preceding stage of the input port in the payout control microcomputer.

  FIG. 59 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output the payout control signal. As shown in FIG. 59, the winning detection switches (the winning combination winning switches 34a and 34b, the winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the third starting opening switch 12a) are game balls. The game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and turns the output state of the prize ball number signal in accordance with the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize. To the state. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detection signal of a winning detection switch, a predetermined winning ball The number is added to the content of the total number of winning balls stored in the backup RAM. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set according to the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. To the state.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by any one of the winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the third starting opening switch 12a, four awards are obtained. When a ball is paid out and a game ball is detected by any one of the prize winning switches 34a and 34b, 15 prize balls are paid out (see FIG. 63). Further, as described above, since the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, among the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits, the lower 4 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in reality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which the signal is transmitted only from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, but by bidirectional communication, A prize ball number signal may be transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37. When performing bidirectional communication, the payout control microcomputer, for example, transmits an ACK signal (response signal) to the game control microcomputer 560 in response to reception of the prize ball REQ signal, or receives a prize ball number signal. An ACK signal indicating that the game has been performed is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the switch process (S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is certainly turned on. Specifically, the switch process is activated every 2 ms, but if the switch is detected to be turned on in both the switch process activated at the present time and the switch process activated 2 ms ago, the switch process is surely performed. Determined to be on.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The last-time port buffer is a buffer in which the switch-on / off determination result of the last time (assuming 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer that stores the previous switch-on / off determination result (assumed to be 2 ms before). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. The bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times before the second corresponds to the bit arrangement of the input port 0. That is, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 0 to 7 and the like shown in FIG. 56 is set in bits 0 to 7 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the switch processing in S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the CPU 56 sets the content of the previous port buffer to the previous data (S331). Also, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the bits of the port buffer and the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (S334).

  Then, input port data to which the detection signal of each switch is input is input (S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (S336). The processes of S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the data input from the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input and the previous data (S337). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value is “1” between each bit of the port buffer and each bit of the previous port buffer. In other words, among the detection signals of each switch, the bit corresponding to the detection signal has changed from the state 2 ms ago from the state 4 ms ago (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). It is “1”. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port is calculated in S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port and the state 2 ms before is 4 ms. The bit changed from the previous state becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The CPU 56 stores the result of the logical product operation in the switch-on buffer (S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the CPU 56 can confirm that the switch detection signal corresponding to the bit that is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice in succession, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms. It can be done.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball process in S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (S341) and a prize ball control process (S342).

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 63 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set at the start address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball will be paid out by winning from the next address. The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 56).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number addition processing in S341. In the winning ball number adding process, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the winning ball number table in the pointer (S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (S353).

  Then, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the data of the prize ball number table pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (S355). Further, the pointer value is increased by 1 (S356).

  If the calculation result in S355 is not 0 (N in S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the process proceeds to S362A. If the calculation result in S355 is 0 (Y in S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (S359), and if the number of processes is 0, the process ends. If the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to S354 (S360).

  In S362A, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the switch input bit determination value used in the process of S355 is a bonus winning switch input bit determination value. That is, in S361, it is confirmed whether or not it is confirmed that the prize winning switch 34a or 34b is turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the prize winning switch 34a or 34b).

  When the switch input bit determination value is the bonus winning switch input bit determination value (Y in S362A), the CPU 56 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag to 7, 8, 10 , 11 or 14 (S362B). That the value of the first special symbol process flag is any of 7, 8, 10, 11 or 14 indicates that in the first special symbol process, the processing during the opening of the accessory in S305b, and the post-processing after the closing of the accessory in S305c , A process during opening of the first big winning opening in S307, a process after closing the first big winning opening in S308, a process before opening the first small hit in S310, and a process during opening of the first small hit in S311 are executed. Means that. In other words, when the game control is normally executed, the control for opening the special winning opening is being performed. Further, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of 7, 8, 10, 11 or 14, which means that in the second special symbol process, the processing of releasing the accessory in S505b and the closing of the accessory in S505c are performed. This means that any one of the post-processing, the second large winning opening opening process in S507, the second large winning opening closing post process in S508, and the second small hit opening process in S511 is executed. In other words, when the game control is normally executed, the game is controlled such that the special winning opening is opened.

  When the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7, 8, 10, 11 or 14, or when the second special symbol process flag is 7, 8, 10, 11 or 14 (Y in S362B), The CPU 56 sets the data (in this case, the number of prize balls) in the prize ball number table pointed to by the pointer as the prize ball addition value (S364), and the prize ball addition value is a 16-bit total prize formed in the RAM 55. It adds to the contents of the ball number storage buffer (S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (S357, S358). Then, the process proceeds to S359.

  The state where the value of the first special symbol process flag is not 7, 8, 10, 11, 14 and the value of the second special symbol process flag is not any of 7, 8, 10, 11, 14 The big hit game, the semi-big hit game and the small hit game are not executed, and the control for opening the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is not executed. In such a state, the fact that it is detected that the accessory winning switch 34a, 34b is turned on indicates that an abnormal winning has occurred in the variable winning ball apparatus 20, or a detection signal from the accessory winning switch 34a, 34b. This means that noise has been applied for a long period (over 4 ms). Therefore, the state where the value of the first special symbol process flag is not 7, 8, 10, 11, 14 and the value of the second special symbol process flag is not any of 7, 8, 10, 11, 14. When it is detected that the prize winning switch 34a, 34b is turned on (N in S362B), the control for adding the prize ball addition value to the total prize ball number storage buffer is not executed. In other words, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the prize winning switch 34a, 34b is turned on is not executed (the process of S364 and S365 is skipped). Then, the process proceeds to S359.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the accessory winning switch input bit determination value (N in S362A), the CPU 56 determines whether the switch input bit determination value used in the process of S355 is the second start port switch input bit determination value. It is confirmed whether or not (S363A). That is, in S361, it is confirmed whether or not it is confirmed that the second start port switch 14a is turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the second start port switch 14a).

  When the switch input bit determination value is the second start port switch input bit determination value (Y in S363A), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (S363B). That the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 means that the normal electric accessory actuating process of S103 is being executed in the normal symbol process. That is, it means that the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15) is being opened and closed.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the second start port switch input bit determination value (N of S363A) and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (Y of S363B), the CPU 56 indicates that the pointer is The prize ball number table data pointed to (in this case, the number of prize balls) is set as the prize ball addition value (S364), and the prize ball addition value is stored in the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55. The contents are added (S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (S357, S358). Then, the process proceeds to S359.

  When the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3, the normal variable winning ball device 15 is not operating and the control for opening the normal variable winning ball device 15 is not executed. In such a state, it is detected that the second start opening switch 14a is turned on. This means that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 or a detection signal from the second start opening switch 14a is long. This means that noise has been applied for a period (over 4 ms). Therefore, when it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in S363B), the prize ball addition value is added to the total prize ball number storage buffer. Do not execute control. That is, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on is not executed (the process of S364 and S365 is skipped). Then, the process proceeds to S359.

  In the above-described processing, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred based on the values of the special symbol process flags (the first special symbol process flag and the second special symbol process flag). However, when it is detected that the prize winning switch 34a, 34b is turned on when the big prize opening is not actually opened, a prize ball payout based on the fact that the prize winning switch 34a, 34b is turned on is made. It may not be executed. However, when configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. Since the big winning opening is opened or closed over a plurality of rounds, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by judging whether or not the actual winning opening is controlled. To be complicated.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the prize winning opening and the positions where the accessory winning prize switches 34a and 34b are installed, it is judged abnormal whether it is actually controlled to open the prize winning opening. When determining whether or not a winning has occurred, it is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won a winning prize immediately before closing, after performing a control to close the winning prize opening. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the big prize opening to the installation position of the prize winning switch 34a, 34b. In other words, it is necessary to start the determination as to whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred after a certain period of time has passed since the control for actually closing the special winning opening is performed. This also complicates the processing.

  However, as in this embodiment, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred after the big winning end processing or the small winning end processing is completed, It is not necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the mouth to the installation position of the prize winning switch 34a, 34b. The game balls that have won the big winning opening immediately before closing during the processing period of the big hit end processing or the small hit end processing after the closing of the big winning opening have reached the installation positions of the accessory winning switches 34a and 34b. Because. In this embodiment, during the processing period of the big hit end process or the small hit end process, that is, during the period when the big hit end display or the small hit end display is made on the effect display device 9, It is set to be longer than the time required to reach the installation position of the prize winning switch 34a, 34b.

  Further, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag (see S363B), but actually opens the normal variable winning ball device 15 When the normal variable winning ball device 15 repeats the opening / closing operation based on the opening pattern corresponding to the gaming state in the normal electric accessory operation processing shown in FIG. 55, the normal variable winning ball device 15 is closed. When the second start port switch 14a is detected to be turned on at the time, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on may not be executed. However, when configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data As a result, the determination process is simplified. For example, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened or closed a plurality of times (twice in the embodiment) as in the high base state, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is actually used. If it is determined whether or not the opening control is performed and it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, the processing becomes complicated, but the processing can be simplified by determining based on the normal symbol process flag.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the second start winning opening 14 and the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be closed immediately before closing. It is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won the second start winning opening 14. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the second start winning opening 14 to the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a. Therefore, in this embodiment, the timing for determining the abnormal winning is delayed from the timing for closing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15.

  Specifically, the time until the normal symbol process timer times out after the normal variable winning ball device 15 is closed last (that is, until the normal variable winning ball device 15 is closed in S271 and becomes Y in S261). Is set longer than the time until the game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 reaches the installation position of the second start opening 14a. That is, a closing time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as an opening pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer in S270, and the time until the ordinary symbol process timer times out after the ordinary electric accessory is finally closed in S271. Is set to a time (eg, 3 seconds) that is shorter than the closing time (eg, 5 seconds) (S244). The time until the normal symbol process timer times out after the ordinary electric accessory is closed for the last time (for example, 3 seconds), the game ball that won the second start winning opening 14 is set at the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a. It is sufficiently longer than the time to reach. In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an abnormal winning has occurred due to the winning of the game ball immediately before closing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15.

  As a method of delaying the timing for determining the abnormal winning from the timing for closing the normal variable winning ball device 15, in the above example, the normal variable winning ball device is set a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. 15 is closed, and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, the abnormal winning determination is made, but at the same time as the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed. It may be switched from 3 to 0, and the abnormal winning determination may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Specifically, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed from 3 to 0 (for example, immediately before or immediately after S272 in FIG. 55), a predetermined time is set in the count timer, and every timer interrupt (every 2 ms) Count down the count timer. When it is determined in the award ball number addition process that the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in S363B), it is determined whether or not the count timer is 0. When the count timer is 0, S364 and S365 are determined. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S359. Even with such a configuration, the timing for determining the abnormal winning can be delayed from the timing for closing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15.

  It should be noted that the timing for determining an abnormal winning by the same method can be delayed from the timing for closing the large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus 20) in the determination of the abnormal winning to the special winning opening. Specifically, when the value of the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) is changed from 7 to 0 or from 10 to 0, a predetermined time is set in the count timer, and The count timer is counted down every timer interrupt (every 2 ms). When it is determined that the value of the special symbol process flag is not any of 7, 8, 10, 11, 14 in the prize ball number addition process (N of S362B), it is determined whether the count timer is 0, When the count timer is 0, the process of S364 and S365 is skipped and the process proceeds to S359.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) is not any of 7, 8, 10, 11, 14 in S362B (N in S362B) or normal symbol in S363B. When the value of the process flag is not 3 (N in S363B), the control for prohibiting the prize ball payout may not be performed. As will be described later, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives an abnormal win. This is because the generation of the prize ball based on the abnormal winning is considered to be minimized because the generation is notified.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in S342. In the winning ball control process, the CPU 56 confirms the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (S371). If the value is 0, the process ends. If it is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (S372). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (S373). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (S374). Then, the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the output port for outputting the winning ball number signal (S375). Further, “1” is set to the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (S376).

  A prize ball REQ signal is output by the processing of S376. That is, the prize ball REQ signal is turned on. In addition, a prize ball number signal is output by the process of S375 (see FIG. 59). In this embodiment, the maximum prize ball command value is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number signal designating a payout number of “15” at the maximum is transmitted to the payout control board 37.

  When the prize ball number signal is transmitted, the CPU 56 subtracts the contents of the prize ball number buffer (the number of prize balls paid out to the payout control means) from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (S377).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets an on period of the prize ball REQ signal. Specifically, an initial value is set in the wait counter (S378). Then, the value of the wait counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (S379, S380). When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the on period is terminated.

  That is, “0” is set in the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (S381), and 00 (H) is set in the output port for outputting the prize ball number signal. (S382).

  When the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37 receives the prize ball number signal, it drives the payout device 97 so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball number signal is paid out.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process of SA23. In the abnormal winning notification process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (SA561). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in a main process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see SA44 in FIG. 8). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to SA565. When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in SA45 is decremented by 1 (SA562). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (SA563, S564).

  Next, if the error number validity period timer value is not 0, the error number validity period timer value is decremented by 1 (SA565). In this embodiment, when an abnormal winning is detected continuously within a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) and the cumulative number of abnormal winning detections reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), the abnormal winning is notified. Do. The error count valid period timer is a timer for measuring a predetermined period.

  When the value of the error number valid period timer is 0 (SA566), the CPU 56 sets the value of the error number counter (counter for counting the number of abnormal winning detections) to 0 (SA567) and resets the notified flag. (SA568).

  On the other hand, when the error detection prohibition flag is not set (SA569), the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (SA570). Then, the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the winning combination winning switch (34b) input bit determination value (10 (H), see FIG. 63) is calculated (SA571). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 10 (H), that is, when the prize winning switch 34b is on, the logical product operation result is 10 (H). When the prize winning switch 34b is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0, it is determined that an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred, and the process proceeds to SA575 (SA572).

  If the result of the logical product is 0, an abnormal winning is determined for the accessory winning switch 34a. That is, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the winning combination winning switch (34a) input bit determination value (20 (H), see FIG. 63) (SA573). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 20 (H), that is, when the prize winning switch 34a is on, the logical product operation result is 20 (H). When the prize winning switch 34a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0, it is determined that an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred, and the process proceeds to SA575 (SA574).

  In SA575, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the informed flag is set. When the informed flag is set, control is performed to transmit an abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (SA580). Then, the error number counter is initialized to 0 (SA581).

  If the notified flag is not set, the value of the error number counter is incremented by 1 (SA576), and the error number valid period timer is started (SA577). That is, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) is set. When the value of the error number counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5), the informed flag is set (SA579), and the processes of SA580 and S581 are executed.

  A detection signal indicating that a game ball has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (an accessory) when the error detection prohibition flag is not set, unless a fraudulent act is received or noise is added to the detection signal from the switch. Is not output from the prize winning switch 34a or the prize winning switch 34b. Therefore, when the CPU 56 determines that a detection signal is output from the winning combination winning switch 34a or the winning combination winning switch 34b when the error detection prohibition flag is not set, it is considered that an abnormal winning has occurred for the variable winning ball apparatus 20. .

  Then, when the abnormal winning is detected again before the error number valid period timer times out, and the cumulative number of abnormal winning is detected five times, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 80. When the abnormal control notification designation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 performs an abnormal winning notification effect using the effect device. Note that, by the processing of SA561 to S563, when the production control microcomputer 100 performs initialization notification, it is prohibited to start abnormality notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the initialization notification.

  Further, in this embodiment, abnormal winnings are continuously detected within a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) measured by the error number valid period timer, and the cumulative number of abnormal winning detections is a predetermined number (for example, 5). The system is configured to notify an abnormal winning when the number of times of the winning is reached, but without using the error number validity period timer, it is abnormal when the cumulative number of detected abnormal winnings reaches a predetermined number (for example, five times). You may make it alert | report a winning prize. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 makes an abnormal winning determination (SA571, S572, S573, S574) when the error detection prohibition flag is not set. As in the case of the addition process (see FIG. 64), the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 can be opened under normal control (for example, 7, 8, When a value other than 10, 11, or 14) is indicated, an abnormal winning determination may be performed. That is, in the process of SA569, it may be determined whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag indicates a predetermined value (for example, 0, 6, 9, 12, or 15 may be used).

  Furthermore, the value of the error counter is initialized to 0 in the initialization process at power-on (see S10 in FIG. 9), and is initialized to 0 when a big hit occurs (S134 and FIG. 40 in FIG. 40). 43, and may be initialized at other timings. For example, the value of the error number counter formed in the backup RAM may be initialized in the process executed when it is detected that the power-off signal is output in the power-off detection process (S20 in FIG. 10). . Furthermore, when the number of special symbol variable displays reaches a predetermined number, when the number of jackpot occurrences reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released reaches a predetermined number, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is entered. When the regular number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of discharges from the variable winning ball apparatus 20 reaches a predetermined number, the value of the error number counter may be initialized.

  When the value of the error number counter is initialized at a predetermined timing, a situation occurs in which abnormal winnings frequently occur and the value of the error number counter (for example, an 8-bit counter) exceeds FF (H). However, when the predetermined timing arrives, it is initialized to 0, so that the error number counter can be counted up again based on the detection of the abnormal winning.

  Note that the gaming control microcomputer 100 has a value corresponding to a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 can be opened when the error detection prohibition flag is not set or under normal control (for example, 7, When a value other than 8, 10, 11 or 14) is indicated, it is determined whether or not the specific area switch 30a is turned on based on the detection signal of the specific area switch 30a. It may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 instructs the execution of abnormality notification every time it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred after the cumulative number of abnormal winning detections reaches a predetermined number. An abnormality notification command is transmitted (SA579, SA575, SA580). Therefore, after it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred even once after the cumulative number of abnormal winning detections reaches a predetermined number and the abnormality notifying command is transmitted, the abnormality notifying command is transmitted.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process (the timer interrupt flag data indicates a set state when the timer interrupt flag is “1”; Sometimes indicates a cleared (reset) state). In the main process, when it is confirmed that the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. Further, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (S708). In addition, the counter value of the counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, a random number for determining the number of big hit rounds for determining whether or not to announce the number of big hit rounds) is updated. The random number update process is executed (S709). Further, a notification control process for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (S710). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 24) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  69 to 71 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (S612). Note that when read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (S618). Then, a display result specifying command reception flag is set (S619).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S622).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag (S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628).

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (S629A), the production control CPU 101 stores the second byte data (EXT data) of the combined pending storage number designation command in the combined pending storage number storage area. Store (S629B).

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command (S630A), the effect control CPU 101 sets the first start winning flag (S630B). If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (S630C), the effect control CPU 101 sets the second start winning flag (S630D). If the received effect control command is the third start winning designation command (S630E), the effect control CPU 101 sets the third start winning flag (S630F). If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (S630G), the effect control CPU 101 sets a total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag (S630H).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen indicating that the initialization process has been executed on the production display device 9. (S632A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (S632B), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (S632C). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of an initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in the process of S45. Therefore, when the initialization notification is being performed, the abnormality notification designation command is not received.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed (S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (S644).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize notification designation command (S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (S646).

  If the received effect control command is not an abnormal winning notification designation command, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is a big hit round number designation command (S465a). The number designation command is stored in the jackpot round number storage area (S465b). On the other hand, if it is determined in S465a that the command is not a big hit round number designation command, it is determined whether or not it is a discharge abnormality notification designation command (S465c). If it is determined that the command is an abnormal discharge notification designation command, an abnormal discharge notification designation command reception flag is set (S465d).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (S647). Then, the process proceeds to S611.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 72, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 72A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 72B).

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display state of the summation pending storage display unit 18c. As shown in FIGS. 73 (A) and 73 (B), the total pending storage display portion 18c displays a number of circles (up to 8) corresponding to the count value of the total pending storage count counter. The production control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP 109 to display a circle so that the first reserved memory, the second reserved memory, and the third reserved memory can be distinguished. For example, a circle corresponding to the first reserved memory is displayed in red, a circle corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed in green, and a circle corresponding to the third reserved memory is displayed in blue. The red display corresponding to the first hold memory, the green display corresponding to the second hold memory, and the blue display corresponding to the third hold memory in the total hold memory display unit 18c are the hold specific area shown in FIG. Are displayed in the same order as the order of data.

  In the figure, the circle at the bottom left is a display corresponding to data indicating the first start prize in the reserved specific area (the data indicating the oldest start prize for the first start prize and the second start prize). The reserved memory used for the next variable display is shown, and the circle on the upper right indicates the latest start winning (in the case of (A), data indicating the fifth starting winning in the reserved specific area, ( In the case of B), the data indicates the sixth start winning in the reserved specific area). When the variable display based on the hold memory is executed, the lower left circle indicating the hold memory used for the change display is deleted, so that the first hold memory, the second hold memory, and the third hold memory are deleted. Which of these were used for the variable display. Thereby, the player can identify which of the first reserved memory, the second reserved memory, and the third reserved memory is used for the variable display. When the circle indicating the reserved memory used for the variable display (the lower left circle) is erased, the circles for the remaining reserved memories are shifted to the lower left one by one. Thereby, it is sequentially shown whether the hold memory used for the next variable display is the first hold memory or the second hold memory. In addition, as described above, the third start winning is used for the variable display with priority over the first starting winning and the second starting winning. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. When a third start prize is generated in a state where there is a hold memory and a second hold memory, the display of the third hold memory indicating the third start prize is the order of data indicating the start prize in the hold specific area as described above. In accordance with this change, control is performed so as to display the first start winning in the reserved specific area as shown in (B).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol (first ornament symbol or second ornament symbol) and effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol (first ornament symbol or second ornament symbol) and effect symbol Is controlled to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S805).

  Big hit game processing (S805): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S806).

  Big hit end process (S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception wait process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the semi-hit flag is set (S807), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, even when the special symbol is in the semi-big hit state after the fluctuation stop, the process returns to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (see FIG. 83). However, when the semi-hit state occurs, the variable winning ball device 20 (the accessory) is opened and closed twice to start the game, and the big hit is not made until the game ball that has entered during that time wins the specific area 30. A condition occurs. Then, as described above, at the stage where the big hit state occurs, the big hit start 1 to 4 designation command is transmitted from the CPU 56 (see SA458 in FIG. 43). Therefore, in this variation pattern command reception waiting process, first, it is determined in S807 whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (the accessory) is in the starting operation, that is, whether or not the semi-big hit flag is set, When the flag is set, the effect control CPU 100 determines whether or not any of the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flags is set (S808). If it has not been set yet, the process proceeds to S811. In S811, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set. If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the variation pattern command reception waiting process returns.

  During the starting operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (the accessory) described above, the control of S807 → S808 → S811 of the variation pattern command reception waiting process is repeatedly executed every 2 msec. Then, if a big hit does not occur after the start operation state ends, the control shifts to a special symbol normal process (see SA462), and after that, a change pattern command is transmitted along with the start winning and a change pattern command is received. The flag is set, YES is determined in S811, and the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs after the end of the starting operation, one of the big hit start 1-4 designation commands is transmitted by the SA 458 described above, and one of the big hit start 1-4 designation command reception flags is set. Therefore, the control shifts to S809, the effect control CPU 101 updates the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and then shifts to the control of the jackpot display process.

  On the other hand, if the big hit has not occurred after the start operation is finished, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801) (S813).

  FIGS. 76 and 77 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (S820). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S821). When the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is reset (S822), and the first ornament symbol variation request indicating that the variation of the first ornament symbol is started. A flag is set (S823). Then, for example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the decorative symbol switching timer for determining the switching timing of the lighting LED (S824). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S816.

  If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, the second symbol variation designation command reception flag should be set. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (S825), and sets a second symbol variation request flag indicating that the variation of the second symbol variation is started (S826). Then, for example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the decorative symbol switching timer for determining the switching timing of the lighting LED (S827). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S816.

  In S816, the effect control CPU 101 reads data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the display result specifying command reception flag is set (S817). If the display result specifying command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to S830. When the display result specifying command reception flag is set, the display result (stop) of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) The symbol is determined (S818). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the display result of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area, and stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 78, when the received display result specifying command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. A combination of effect symbols matched with symbols “2” or “4” (a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a normal jackpot) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses “3” or “7” as the stop symbol. The combination of the production symbols arranged with the symbols (stop symbols reminiscent of the occurrence of a probable big hit) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a small hit or suddenly probable big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 3 specifying command or a display result 5 specifying command), the presentation control CPU 101 A combination of “135” (a stop symbol reminiscent of occurrence of a small hit or suddenly probable big hit) is determined as a stop symbol. In the case of detachment (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols in which the symbols at both ends do not match is determined other than the above. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols with both ends aligned is determined.

  When the received display result specifying command indicates a normal semi-big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 6 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses “6” or “ A combination of effect symbols matched with a symbol of “8” (a stop symbol reminiscent of occurrence of a normal jackpot) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a probable variation jackpot (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 8 designation command), the production control CPU 101 uses “1” or “5” as the stop symbol. ”(A stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a semi-probable big hit) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a semi-small hit or a sudden probability change semi-big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 7 specifying command or a display result 9 specifying command), the CPU 101 for effect control Determines a combination of “531” (a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a quasi-small hit or a sudden probability change sub-big hit) as a stop symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. A stop symbol that suddenly recalls a probable big hit is called a sudden probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol that recalls a small hit is called a small hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit at the end of the change. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit at the end of the change.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to make a jackpot round number announcement based on the jackpot round number announcement random number (S818a). If it is determined that the big hit round number notice is to be performed (Y in S818b), the big hit round number notice flag is set and then the process proceeds to S819. However, if it is decided not to perform the big hit round number notice (S818b) N), the process proceeds to S819 without setting the jackpot round number notice flag.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 resets the display result specifying command reception flag (S819). Next, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (S833). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S834).

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the effect symbol. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 79 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that neither an abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormal prize is being notified nor a discharge abnormality notification flag indicating that a discharge abnormality is being notified is set. In accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps and production as production component) The control of the speaker 27) as a component for control is executed (S835A, S835B). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect pattern CPU 101 so that the effect pattern is displayed in a change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 (S835A, S835C). In other words, if either the abnormality notification flag or the discharge abnormality notification flag is set, a sound effect corresponding to the variation display is executed when a new variation display of the effect symbol is started. Instead, the sound output corresponding to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued. If the sound effect sound effect according to the variable display and the alarm sound (notification sound) according to the abnormal winning notification are set in different channels, and these sounds can be output simultaneously, S835B. And S835C need not be separated.

  In addition, when performing the process of S835C, the effect control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. In other words, control is performed so that the display at that time (notification of abnormal winning is made) on the effect display device 9 and the display effect image of the effect symbol variation display are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device 9. That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variation display of the effect symbol is started, only the display effect according to the variation display is not executed, but an abnormal winning notification is made. The notification according to is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S836), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process (S802) (S837). ).

  In S830, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command that can be used for any of the normal big hit, the probable big hit, the normal quasi big hit, and the probable sub big hit has been received. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when the fluctuation pattern commands of “reach C / shortening”, “reach C” and “super reach A” are normal big hits, probable big hits, normal semi big hits The variation pattern command can be used for any of the probable semi-big hits. Therefore, when the data indicating the variation pattern commands are stored in the variation pattern command storage area, the production control CPU 101 performs the normal variation jackpot, the probability variation jackpot, the normal variation jackpot, the probability variation variation jackpot. It is determined that a variation pattern command that can be used at any time is received. When it is determined that the effect control CPU 101 has received a variation pattern command that can be used for any of the normal big hit, the probable big hit, the normal quasi big hit, and the probable sub big hit, The stop symbol is determined as a normal semi-big hit symbol (S832). Also, if it is determined that a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command that can be used for any of the normal big hit, the probable big hit, the normal quasi big hit, and the probable sub big hit is received, the stop pattern Is determined to be a combination of effect symbols according to the received variation pattern (S831). In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern commands other than the fluctuation pattern commands that can be used for the normal big hit, the probable big hit, the normal quasi big hit, and the probable sub big hit are used at the time of disconnection. Or used according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 17). Therefore, when the control CPU 101 receives a variation pattern command other than a variation pattern command that can be used for a normal big hit, a probable big hit, a normal semi big hit, or a probable sub big hit. Based on the received fluctuation pattern command, it is possible to specify whether it is determined to be out of place, or whether it is determined to be a big hit (including a small hit) or a semi-big hit (including a small hit) And if it is determined to be a big hit or semi-big hit, the type of big hit or sub-big hit (normal big hit / quasi big hit, probability variation big hit / quasi big hit, sudden probability variation big hit / sudden probability variation big hit / small Can be specified (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a change pattern command that can be used for any of the normal big hit, the probable big hit, the normal quasi big hit, and the probable sub big hit. When the result specifying command is not received, the display result of the effect symbol (stop symbol) is determined to be the normal semi-hit symbol, so whether the display result specifying command is not received or not Can be recognized by the player. In addition, by including information that can specify the display result of the effect symbol in the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 can display the display result specifying command without using a command other than the variation pattern command and the display result specifying command. Since the display result of the effect symbol can be determined even if it cannot be received, the types of commands transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 do not increase, and as a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 does not increase.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841), and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S842). When the process timer times out (S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (S844). Further, on the condition that neither the abnormality notification flag or the discharge abnormality notification flag is set, the rendering device is based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next. The control state for is changed (S845A, S845B).

  When either the abnormality notification flag or the discharge abnormality notification flag is set, the content of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i). Control of the effect device is executed (S845A, S845C). Therefore, when the abnormal notification flag is set, the sound production according to the variation display of the production symbol is not executed, but the sound output according to the abnormal winning notification is continued.

  Further, when the process of S845C is performed, the effect control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, not only the display effect according to the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, but also the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit round number notice flag is set (S845D). If it is not set, the process proceeds to S846. If it is set, it is stored in the big hit round number storage area. Control is performed to superimpose and display the notice message of the number of big hit rounds on the effect display device 9 (S845E). The notice message is, for example, “If a big hit occurs this time, 15 rounds will continue!”. Whether or not to notify the number of jackpot rounds is determined in S818a of FIG. 77 described above. In this determination, the larger the number of jackpot rounds that are determined in advance, the higher the probability. You may make it make a decision to notify in advance.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (S846), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S848). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S847), the process proceeds to S848. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the design confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stopping the fluctuation. For example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. (S852), control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed according to the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (S853A). In addition, a decorative symbol variation end flag is set (S853B). When the decorative symbol variation end flag is set, the variation in the decorative symbol display that is fluctuating (variable display) between the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b is stopped, and the big hit / loss The lighting of the LED on the side corresponding to is maintained.
Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the big hit round number notice flag is set (S853C). If it is not set, the process proceeds to S854. After resetting the number notice flag (S853D), the process proceeds to S854. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (S854). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is confirmed, for example, by a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit based on the determined stop symbol.

  If it is determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) (S855).

  If it is decided not to make a big hit, it is checked whether or not it is decided to make a semi-hit (S854a). Whether or not it is determined to be a semi-big hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In this embodiment, it can also be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a quasi-hit by the determined stop symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (S856). The short time state flag is set when the gaming state is the short time state (see S886 described later). If the time-short state flag is set, the value of the time-short fluctuation count counter is incremented by 1 (S857).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the time-varying variation number counter is 10 (S858). If the value of the hourly fluctuation count counter is 10, the hourly state flag is reset (S859). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S860).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the variation of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol (variation display) on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see S851, S853A). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the variation of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol may be controlled to end without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variable display.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process (S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag indicating that any of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands has been received is set (S871). If any one of the big hit start 1 to 4 designation command reception flags is set, control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (S872). Further, the set flag (any one of the big hit start 1-4 designation command reception flags) is reset (S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S805) (S874).

  In S872, when the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the production control CPU 101 performs a control to display on the production display device 9 a screen for informing the start of the small hit game. Further, when the big hit start 4 designation command is received, control is performed to display on the effect display device 9 a screen for informing the start of the sudden probability change big hit game. When the jackpot start 1 designation command or the jackpot start 3 designation command is received, a screen for informing the start of the jackpot game (a screen for informing the start of the jackpot game and a notice of the sudden probability change jackpot game) The display control unit 9 controls to display the effect display device 9 (which is different from the screen).

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (S880). If the big hit end effect timer is set, then the flow shifts to S885. When the jackpot end effect timer is not set, a jackpot end designation command reception flag (a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot termination designation command has been received is set. It is confirmed whether there is (S881). When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag is reset (S882), and a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end presentation timer (S883). The display device 9 is controlled to display a jackpot end screen (screen for notifying the end of the jackpot game) (S884). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In this embodiment, even if the type of jackpot is different, the same jackpot end screen is displayed on the effect display device 9. For example, the big hit end display and the small hit end display are the same. However, the small hit end display (including the small hit end display) may be divided according to the type of the big hit.

  In S885, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (S886). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the time reduction state flag is set (S887), and the time reduction number counter is set to 0 (S888). If a jackpot end 1 designation command has been received, the probability variation state flag is reset (S889, S891). When the jackpot end 1 designation command has not been received (when the jackpot end 2 designation command has been received), the probability variation state flag is set (S889, S890). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S892).

  The probability change state flag and the time reduction state flag are used, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 notifies the probability change state and the time reduction state by a background or a decorative light emitter (lamp / LED) in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol display control process of S706 in the effect control main process. In the first decorative symbol display control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first decorative symbol changing flag is set (S781). If the first decorative symbol variation flag is set, the process proceeds to S785. If the first decorative symbol variation flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the first decorative symbol variation request flag is set (S782). If the first decorative symbol variation request flag is set, the first decorative symbol variation request flag is reset (S783), and the first decorative symbol variation flag is set (S784).

  In S785, it is confirmed whether or not the decorative symbol variation end flag is set. The decorative symbol variation end flag is set in S853B (see FIG. 81). If the decorative symbol variation end flag is set, the decorative symbol variation end flag is reset (S786), and the display result is displayed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a according to the data stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area. Is displayed (S791), and the first decorative symbol changing flag is reset (S792).

  When the decoration symbol change end flag is not set, the value of the decoration symbol switching timer is decremented by 1 (S787). If the value of the decorative symbol switching timer is 0 (S788), that is, if the lighting LED switching timing is reached, the LED to be lit in the first decorative symbol display 9a is switched (S789), and the decorative symbol switching timer is set. For example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is reset (S790).

  By the control as described above, the LEDs that are turned on in the first decorative symbol display 9a are switched, for example, every 0.5 seconds, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is realized.

  The program of the second decorative symbol display control process (S707) is configured in the same manner as the first decorative symbol display control process. That is, in the above description of the first decorative symbol display control process, if “first” is read as “second”, the second decorative symbol display control process will be described.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9. FIG. 85 (A) shows an example of an initial screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. On the initial screen, the message “initialized” is displayed in a manner of being superimposed on the production symbol. FIG. 85 (B) shows an example of a power failure recovery screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the power failure recovery designation command. FIG. 85C shows an example of an abnormality notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the abnormal prize notification designation command by the effect control CPU 101, and the change of the effect symbol is started. Also, it is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued (see the right side of FIG. 85C). On the abnormality notification screen, a message that “a winning error has occurred” is displayed in a manner of being superimposed on the staging pattern. On the abnormality notification screen, the message “A prize error has occurred” may be displayed at a position different from the position where the effect symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 85 (D) shows an example of an abnormality notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9 by the effect control CPU 101 in response to the reception of the discharge abnormality designation command, and even if the change of the effect symbol is started. It is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued (see the right side of FIG. 85 (D)). On the anomaly notification screen, a message that “clogging has occurred” is displayed in a manner of being superimposed on the production symbol. Note that, on the abnormality notification screen, the message “clogging has occurred” may be displayed at a position different from the position where the effect symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process in the effect control main process. In the hold memory display control process, the effect control CPU 101 stores the data in the sum hold memory number storage area in which the second byte data (EXT data) of the sum hold memory number designation command is stored in the sum hold memory number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the value is larger than the value (S921).

  If it is determined in S921 that the data in the total pending storage number storage area is not greater than the value of the total pending storage number counter, the process proceeds to S935. The fact that the data in the total pending storage count storage area is larger than the value of the total pending storage count counter means that a new total pending storage count designation command has been received. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first start winning flag indicating that the first start winning designation command has been received is set (S922). When it is determined in S922 that the first start winning flag is set, the first starting winning flag is reset (S923), the number of round marks displayed in the total pending storage display portion 18c is increased by 1, and the increased round Control is performed so that the mark is displayed in red (S924). Also, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter (S925), and the process is terminated.

  When it is determined in S922 that the second start winning flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second start winning flag indicating that the second start winning designation command has been received is set. (S926). When it is determined in S926 that the second start winning flag is set, the second starting winning flag is reset (S927), the number of circles displayed in the total pending storage display portion 18c is increased by 1, and the increased number of circles is increased. Control is performed so that the mark is displayed in green (S928). Also, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter (S929), and the process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in S926 that the second start winning flag is not set, it is determined that the third start winning designation command is received in accordance with the erasure method, and the third start winning flag is reset (S930). ). Then, in order to determine whether there is each of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory, display data for displaying a red circle in the image display on the total reserved memory display unit 18c and the green data It is determined whether at least one of the display data for displaying a circle is used (S931).

  If it is determined in S931 that at least one of the display data for displaying the red circle and the display data for displaying the green circle is not used, there is no pending storage, or the third This is when only the hold storage display (blue) is performed. In such a case, since it is not necessary to give priority to the third reserved storage, the number of circles displayed in the total reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1, and the increased circle is controlled to be displayed in blue (S931A). ). Then, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter (S934), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S931 that at least one of display data for displaying a red circle and display data for displaying a green circle is used, priority should be given to the third reserved storage. Therefore, the display of the hold storage is changed in such a manner that the display locations indicating the red and green circles are shifted one by one in the increasing direction in the display of the hold storage in the combined hold storage display unit 18c (S932). Then, by controlling to display a blue circle indicating the third reserved memory in the empty area of the reserved memory display caused by the shift of the reserved memory display in the total reserved memory display unit 18c, Is increased by 1 (S933). As a result, the hold storage as shown in FIG. Then, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter (S934), and the process ends.

  Further, when it is determined in S921 that the data in the total pending storage number storage area is not larger than the value of the total pending storage number counter and the process proceeds to S935, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the total pending storage number Check if the subtraction designation command reception flag is set. If the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is set, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is reset (S936), and the most previous in the total pending storage display section 18c as shown in FIG. The displayed circle is erased, and each circle is controlled so as to be shifted to the erased circle (S937). As described above, when the variable display based on the hold memory is executed, the control for deleting the circle indicating the hold memory used for the variable display is performed, so that the next variable display is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is shown which is the variable display based on the symbol. Thereby, the player can identify which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is used for the next variable display. Then, the value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by -1 (S938), and the value of the total pending storage number counter is set in the total pending storage number storage area (S939).

  When it is determined in S935 that the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is set, the circle displayed most recently (displayed in the lower left) in the total pending storage display portion 18c is flashed. Then, after the variable display corresponding to the on-hold storage displayed in blinking is completed, display control for deleting the blinking circle may be performed. By doing so, it is shown which of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the third special symbol the current variation display is based on the variation display. Thereby, the player can identify which one of the first hold memory, the second hold memory, and the third hold memory is used for the current variation display.

  Further, in S937, when deleting the circle of the reserved storage displayed in the lower left corner of the combined hold storage display unit 18c as shown in FIG. It may be. By doing so, the player can more clearly identify which of the first reserved memory, the second reserved memory, and the third reserved memory is used for the variable display.

  By the control as described above, the red circle is incremented by 1 when the first start winning designation command and the total pending storage designation command are received in the total pending storage display unit 18c, and the second start winning designation command and the total are displayed. Control is implemented in which a green circle is incremented by 1 when a reserved memory number designation command is received, and a blue circle is incremented by 1 when a third start winning designation command and a combined pending memory number designation command are received. . Further, when the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received, the circle displayed on the total pending storage display portion 18c is decremented by one. In addition, when the third start winning designation command and the combined reserved storage number designation command are received, the variable display is performed in preference to the reserved memory corresponding to the first starting prize and the reserved memory corresponding to the second start prize. This can be indicated by the display of the hold memory.

  Note that the game control microcomputer 560 also transmits a total pending storage number designation command even when the power supply is restored. In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize the total number of pending storages, but cannot recognize the breakdown (how many of the total number of pending storages are among the total number of pending storages). Therefore, when receiving the power failure recovery designation command and the total pending storage number designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the number of circles designated by the total pending storage count designation command as the total pending storage display section 18c. However, the color is changed to a color other than red or green, or displayed in a form other than a circle.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the notification control process of S710. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (S901). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see S632B in FIG. 71). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to S906. When the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer set in S632C is decremented by 1 (S902). Then, when the value of the period timer becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (S903, S904).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 to the VDP 109 (S905). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  In S906, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process is terminated. When the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (S907), and the effect display device 9 notifies the abnormal display to the screen displayed at that time. A command to superimpose and display the screen is output to the VDP 109 (S908). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the command (see FIG. 85C).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (S909). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input voice data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (S910).

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect in the effect display device 9 and the sound effect by the speaker 27. FIG. 88 (A) shows an example in which the effect display device 9 is performing a variation display of effect symbols. FIG. 88 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 88C shows an example in which abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and outputs the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. To do. Moreover, even if the display of the effect symbol change is started in response to the reception of the change pattern command, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even when the effect symbol variation display ends, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. The production control microcomputer 100 does not execute the control for deleting the abnormality notification screen and the control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, so that the display of the abnormality notification screen on the production display device 9 and the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are not performed. The output continues until the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. However, the production control microcomputer 100 stops the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound have started. You may control.

  In this embodiment, the abnormality notification is performed by the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27. However, the abnormality notification may be performed using a lamp / LED. In that case, when receiving the abnormal winning notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lamp / LED to blink in a manner different from that in the normal state (when no abnormal winning has occurred). . Further, even when the abnormality notification is also performed using the lamp / LED, the abnormality notification using the lamp / LED is continued even when the variation display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer 560 does not detect abnormal winnings for a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (period in which the initialization notification is executed). An abnormal winning notification designation command is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. However, when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment) or the value of the normal symbol process flag is a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), the game control microcomputer 560 When the abnormal control is detected, and the production control microcomputer 100 receives the abnormal winning notification designation command within a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the abnormal winning is determined. This notification may not be performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization notification becomes difficult to recognize. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an initialization designation command when a user reset is generated to start execution of the program from the start address (for example, address 0000) even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. To do. As a cause of the occurrence of the user reset, for example, when the watchdog timer is configured to be used, there is a case where the watchdog timer has timed out due to an illegal action that hinders the smooth progress of the program. Such fraudulent acts are configured to be controlled in a probabilistic state, particularly when a predetermined jackpot symbol (predetermined probability variation jackpot symbol or sudden probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined based on a random number for determining the jackpot symbol It is likely to occur when it is. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized, and a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determining random number is initialized, and it is easy to receive an illegal act that makes it easy to grasp the count value of the counter. As shown in this embodiment, by making the initialization notice conspicuous, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the game control microcomputer 560 has been initialized, and thus an illegal act has been made. It is easily recognized that there is a possibility.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when a predetermined period has elapsed (see S901 to S905), but ends the initialization notification at another timing. Also good. For example, the initialization notification is ended when the variation display of the effect symbol is started for the first time after the initialization notification is started, or the abnormal winning notification designation command is received before the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Sometimes the initialization notification may be terminated. Alternatively, the initialization notification may be terminated when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received or when the first effect control command other than the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the initialization notification is started. That is, it is preferable that the initialization notification is continued only for a period sufficient for the game store clerk or the like to recognize the initialization notification.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control means receives the variation pattern command, but when the display result specifying command cannot be received, the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit. If it is determined that a change pattern command other than the change pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit is received is determined. Since the stop symbol is determined as a combination of effect symbols corresponding to the received variation pattern, the effect display device 9 can notify that a big hit will occur even if the display result specifying command cannot be received due to noise or the like. Furthermore, immediately after receiving the variation pattern command, when it is determined that an effect control command other than the display result specifying command has been received, the above-described control based on the received variation pattern command may be performed. That is, the effect control means determines that the regular command has not been received (for example, the display result specifying command cannot be received) or determines that the non-normal command has been received (for example, the display result following the variation pattern command). When an effect control command other than the specific command is received), it is preferable to execute effect control (for example, determine a stop symbol of the effect symbol) based on the received regular command. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged due to non-reception of a regular command or reception of a non-regular command.

  The same control may be performed for other effect control commands. For example, when a jackpot start specifying command that can specify the start of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the display result specifying command that has already been received (for example, the display result 2 specifying command that indicates a normal jackpot is the display result specifying When it is stored in the command storage area, when the jackpot start 3 designation command indicating the probability variation jackpot is received, the effect control based on the jackpot start designation command (for example, the effect device notifies the probability variation jackpot) ) Or a jackpot end designation command that can identify the end of a specific gaming state is received and does not match the received jackpot start designation command (for example, a jackpot start 1 designation command indicating a normal jackpot) After receiving a jackpot end designation 2 command indicating a probable big hit) Based on the command effect control (e.g., the background of the effect display device 9 on the background corresponding to the probability variation state) is executed. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control of the effect control means from being confused as much as possible with the control of the game control means.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the occurrence timing of the abnormal winning (the value of the first special symbol process flag is not 7, 8, 10, 11, 14 or the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7, 8). If any game ball wins the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14 when the value of the normal symbol process flag is other than 10, 11 or 14, and the normal symbol process flag value is other than 3, an abnormal winning occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. If a predetermined number of game balls win at the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14 at the occurrence timing of the abnormal winning, the abnormal winning has occurred. You may make it determine. For example, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred when it is determined that five game balls have accumulated in the big winning opening during a time other than the big winning game or the small winning game. Further, when it is determined that two game balls have accumulated in the second start winning opening 14 when it is not during the opening / closing operation of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred.

  In the above embodiment, the abnormal winning notification of the same content is performed both when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and when an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14 occurs. You may make it perform a prize alert | report. Specifically, an abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and an abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted when an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 occur are different. The command is used (the command transmission table address set in S559 and the command transmission table address set in S564 are different addresses). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes different abnormal winning notifications depending on the type of the abnormal winning notification designation command from the gaming control microcomputer 560. For example, a different notification sound is generated when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and when an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 occurs. Or, when an abnormal prize is received at the big prize opening, the abnormality is notified with a loud sound.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, even when it is detected that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b or the second decorative symbol indicator. The variation of the decoration symbol in 9b and the variation of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are configured to be executed continuously. Therefore, when the game ball is illegally awarded to the second start winning opening 14 (for example, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is illegally opened even though the normal symbol is not the winning symbol, and the second start winning opening 14 is Even if a game ball is won in the game), a big hit may be generated by the start winning, and the ball may be illegally acquired. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when it is detected that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol are stopped at a predetermined timing. ing.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol process in the second embodiment. In the second special symbol process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not an abnormal winning detection flag indicating that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected is set (S1315). Here, the abnormal winning detection flag is set when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, that is, when N in S559B of FIG.

  When the abnormal winning detection flag is set (Y in S1315), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second special symbol is changed in the second special symbol display 8b, specifically, the second special symbol process. It is determined whether the value of the flag is a value (“4”) indicating the second special symbol changing process (S504) (S1316). When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value (“4”) indicating the second special symbol changing process (Y in S1316), the processing after S521 described above is executed. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is caused to continuously execute the variation of the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is not a value indicating the second special symbol changing process (“4”) (N in S1316), the second special symbol process is terminated. That is, the variation control of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol indicator 8b. With such a configuration, when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, if the second special symbol is not changing, the second special symbol is immediately prohibited from being changed, and the second special symbol is prohibited. When the change is in progress, the change of the second special symbol is continued, and the change of the next second special symbol is prohibited.

  In FIG. 89, the control for prohibiting the variation of the second special symbol based on the detection of the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has been described. Based on the fact that the abnormal winning is detected, the control for prohibiting the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be performed. In this case, the same processing as S1315 and S1316 shown in FIG. 89 may be executed before the processing of S21 in the first special symbol process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect control process in the second embodiment. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set (S809A). When the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set (Y in S809A), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the effect symbol is changed in the effect display device 9, specifically, the effect control process flag. It is determined whether or not the value is a value (“2”) indicating the effect symbol variation processing (S802) (S809B). When the value of the production control process flag is a value (“2”) indicating the production symbol variation processing (Y in S809B), the production symbol variation processing (S802) is executed. In other words, the effect display device 9 causes the effect symbols to be continuously changed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect control process flag is not a value (“2”) indicating the effect symbol changing process (N in S809B), the effect control process process is terminated. That is, the effect display device 9 stops the effect symbol variation control. With such a configuration, when the abnormal winning notification designation command is received, if the production design is not changing, the production design is immediately changed, and if the production design is changing, the production design changes. Is continued, and the variation of the next effect design is prohibited.

  As described above, when the variation of the effect symbol is prohibited in the effect control process, the second ornament symbol variation request flag is not set (see S826 in FIG. 76), and the variation of the second ornament symbol is not started ( 84), the variation of the second decorative symbol is also prohibited. If the change in the effect design is prohibited in the effect control process, the first design change request flag is not set (S826 in FIG. 76), as in the case of the second design change, and the change in the first design change. Is not started (S782 in FIG. 84), the variation of the first decorative symbol is also prohibited. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the change of the effect symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is prohibited based on the reception of the abnormal winning notification designation command. Also good.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol (and the first special symbol display) in the second special symbol display unit 8b based on the detection of the abnormal winning at the second start winning port 14. Variation of the first special symbol on the device 8a), variation of the second decorative symbol on the second ornament symbol display 9b (and variation of the first ornament symbol on the first ornament symbol display 9a), and the effect on the effect display device 9 Since the control for prohibiting the variation of the symbol is executed, when the winning to the second start winning opening 14 is generated by the fraudulent act (for example, the normal variable winning ball apparatus in which the normal symbol does not become the winning symbol) Even when the game ball is won at the second start winning opening 14 by releasing 15, it is possible to reliably prevent occurrence of a big hit based on the winning.

  In the second embodiment, whether or not the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol changing process, and the value of the effect control process flag indicates the effect symbol changing process. The control for prohibiting the fluctuation of the symbol was executed after confirming whether or not it was a value, but it is not limited to such a configuration, for example, when an abnormal winning detection flag is set, and When the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, control for prohibiting the variation of the symbol may be performed immediately. Further, the number of reserved memories at the time when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected is confirmed, and the variation of the symbols is continued until the variation of the symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is completed. When the symbol variation is finished, control for prohibiting the symbol variation may be performed. Specifically, when the abnormal winning detection flag is set, the number of reserved memory is confirmed, the counter counts whether or not a change corresponding to the confirmed reserved memory number has been executed, and the change corresponding to the reserved memory number is completed. Control that prohibits fluctuations is sometimes executed. According to such a configuration, the fluctuation based on the start winning to the normal second start winning opening 14 can be continued, and the fluctuation based on the abnormal winning can be prohibited. In the above configuration, in the case of prohibiting the fluctuation of the symbol based on the abnormal winning correctly, the fluctuation of the symbol is prohibited at the time when the fluctuation of the reserved storage number −1 when the abnormal winning is detected is finished. You may do it.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, by checking whether the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value (“3”) indicating the normal electric accessory actuating process, the second start winning award port 14 is reached at a normal timing. It is determined whether or not a prize has been generated (see S560 to S563 in FIG. 52). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and by confirming whether or not a winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred at the timing when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the first is reached at a normal timing. It may be determined whether or not a winning at the 2-start winning port 14 has occurred.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory operating process in the third embodiment. In the normal electric actor operation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (S261). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in S261), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (S262).

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (S281). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has expired (S282). If not timed out (N in S282), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in S282), the CPU 56 sets the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer (S283). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by confirming, for example, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid output bit of the output port buffer (solenoid buffer) (S284).

  When the normal variable winning ball device 15 is closed (Y in S284), the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 15a to open the normal variable winning ball device 15 (S285). Then, since this timing is not the timing at which the game ball normally wins the second start winning opening 14, a process is performed to check whether or not an abnormal win has occurred in the second starting winning opening 14. That is, the CPU 56 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (S287). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (S288). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14).

  If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in S288), the process ends. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in S288), the second start port switch 14a has been turned on at an incorrect timing, so the CPU 56 controls the abnormal winning notification designation command. Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100 is performed (S289).

  When the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open in S284 (N in S284), the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 15a and close the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 (S286). Since this timing is the timing at which the game ball normally wins at the second start winning opening 14, the process for checking whether or not an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred is not performed.

  In S261, when the normal symbol process timer expires (Y in S261), the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S200). (S272).

  91, the processing corresponding to S264 to S267 (ordinary electric winning prize winning count process) of the normal electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. 55 is not shown in the normal electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. The normal electric accessory operation process shown in 91 may be executed in the same manner. In addition, when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in the ordinary electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. 91, it is necessary to execute S560 to S564 of the abnormal winning notification process shown in FIG. Absent.

  According to the configuration as described above, the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected at the closing timing of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15, so that the second starting winning opening 14 can be detected at a more accurate timing. It becomes possible to detect abnormal winnings.

  As described in the first embodiment, in the third embodiment, the timing for determining an abnormal winning may be delayed from the timing for closing the normal variable winning ball device 15. For example, the timer is started when the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 changes from the open state to the closed state (that is, when the N changes from S284 to Y), and when the timer times out, S287 to S290. To execute the process. According to such a method, it can be prevented that it is erroneously determined that an abnormal winning has occurred even though the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 at regular timing.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, there is a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 in the winning ball number adding process shown in FIG. 64 (Y in S363A), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is the normal electric accessory. By configuring so that the number of prize balls is not added to the total prize ball number storage buffer when the value indicates the operation process (“3”), prize balls are not paid out based on abnormal winnings. It was composed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. When an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in the switch process, the winning itself may be invalidated.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing switch processing according to the fourth embodiment. In the switch processing, S331 to S338 are the same as the processing described in FIG. After executing the processing of S338, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning ball device 15) is being opened (S339). Here, whether or not the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is being opened can be determined, for example, by checking the normal electric accessory solenoid output bit of the output port buffer (solenoid buffer).

  When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is being opened (Y in S339), the process is ended as it is. When the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not open but closed (N in S339), the CPU 56 sets the second start port switch input bit (bit corresponding to the second start port switch 14a) of the switch-on buffer. Clear (0) is set (S340). As a result, when an abnormal winning is made to the second starting winning opening 14, the starting winning itself can be invalidated. In this case, it is not necessary to execute a process for preventing the prize ball number from being added to the total prize ball number storage buffer when an abnormal winning to the second starting prize opening 14 occurs in the prize ball number addition process. .

  In S339, it is confirmed whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is being opened, but it is confirmed whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is a value (“3”) indicating the ordinary electric accessory operation processing. You may make it invalidate 2 start prizes.

  Further, as described in the third embodiment, the timing for determining the abnormal winning may be delayed from the timing for closing the normal variable winning ball device 15.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, the starting winning itself is invalidated in the switch process. In the fifth embodiment, the second starting winning is performed. When an abnormal winning to the mouth 14 occurs, the starting winning itself is invalidated in the second special symbol process.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol process in the fifth embodiment. In the second special symbol process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the invalid flag is set (S1317) before performing the confirmation process (S521) of turning on the second start port switch 14a and the third start port switch 12a. . Here, the invalid flag is set when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”, the second start port switch 14a is turned on a predetermined number of times or more, so that the start port abnormality counter becomes a predetermined value or more. In the case of the third embodiment, when the start port abnormal counter becomes a predetermined value or more because the second start port switch 14a is turned on a predetermined number of times or more while the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed. It is. In S1317, it may be checked whether the abnormal winning detection flag described in the second embodiment is set instead of the invalid flag.

  When the invalid flag is set (Y in S1317), the CPU 56 confirms whether the second start port switch 14a and the third start port switch 12a are turned on (S521) or passes through the second start port switch (S522). Is not executed and the invalid flag is not set (N in S1317), the second start port switch 14 and the third start port switch 12a are turned on (S521) or the second start port switch passing process ( S522) is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent random number extraction based on the abnormal second start winning, and the variation based on the abnormal winning is prohibited, and the occurrence of the big hit based on the abnormal winning is surely prevented. can do.

  In the case of the fifth embodiment, since it is not possible to prohibit the payout of the winning ball based on the abnormal winning, the first embodiment (the winning ball number adding process in FIG. 64) and the fourth embodiment (the switch in FIG. 92). It is preferable to simultaneously execute the control for prohibiting award ball payout based on the abnormal winning as described in the processing.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the winning stage 120 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as a sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is an enlarged perspective view showing a winning stage 1200 according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 94, (a) shows the configuration of the winning stage 1200, and (b) shows a representative example of a path along which the game balls P1, P2 roll in the winning stage 1200. A winning stage 1200 shown in FIG. 94 is provided instead of the winning stage 120 described above.

  Referring to (a) of FIG. 94, the winning stage 1200 has an arc shape when viewed from the front, similarly to the winning stage 120 described above, and has a third start winning port 12 and a falling ball entrance at the center. An opening 17a is formed. A falling ball outlet 17b is provided below the falling ball inlet 17a. A guide path for guiding a game ball is formed between the falling ball inlet 17a and the falling ball outlet 17b, and the game ball that has entered from the falling ball inlet 17a is released forward from the falling ball outlet 17b and falls. . A third start port switch 12 a is built in the lower portion of the third start winning port 12.

  As shown in (b), the winning stage 1200 includes a first passage 121a and a second passage 121b, which are two passages having a width that allows a game ball to roll from the left and right upper portion toward the central portion when viewed from the front. Are provided in parallel. The 1st channel | path 121a is formed in the aspect which passes in front of the 3rd start winning opening 12. The second passage 121b is formed so as to pass in front of the falling ball inlet 17a. In the winning stage 1200, the first passage 121a and the second passage 121b are formed so that the vicinity of the entrance of the third start winning opening 12 is raised upward.

  In the winning stage 1200 configured as described above, when the game ball flows down on the winning stage 1200, the game ball rolls on the winning stage 1200 and wins the third start winning opening 12 or enters the falling ball entrance 17a. Enter or fall down without entering them. For example, as shown in (b), the game ball P1 rolling on the first passage 121a enters the third start winning opening 12 via the first passage 121a as shown in the route r3, and enters the third start opening. There is a case where it is detected by the switch 12a, and there is a case where the switch 12a is detached from the first passage 121a and falls downward. As shown in (b), the game ball P2 rolling on the second passage 121b enters the falling ball inlet 17a via the second passage 121b and falls from the falling ball outlet 17b as shown in the route r4. In such a case, when falling off the second passage 121b and dropping downward, the second passage 121b may come off and roll onto the first passage 121a.

  In this way, by providing a winning stage 1200 in which the game ball can roll at the third start winning opening 12 and showing the player whether or not the game ball enters the third starting winning opening 12, Interest can be improved. In the case of the winning stage 1200, a plurality of game ball passages and entrances (first passage 121a, second passage 121, third start winning port 12, and falling ball entrance 17a) are provided. The behavior of the game is rich in change, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The first big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (a), the second big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (b), the first semi-big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (c), and the second semi-big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (d) This modification will be described as an eighth embodiment. In the first embodiment, the second jackpot symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table) is more than the maximum (7R) of the jackpot rounds determined by the first jackpot symbol table (or the first quasi-hit symbol table). The one with the larger number of rounds was shown as the minimum (9R) of the big hit rounds determined by (1). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum hit number determined by the first jackpot symbol table (or the first quasi-hit symbol table) and the jackpot determined by the second jackpot symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table). The minimum number of rounds may be the same value. The maximum number of rounds may be larger than the minimum number of rounds. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the number of jackpot rounds determined in the first jackpot symbol table (or the first quasi-hit symbol table) is 3R, 6R, 9R, and the second jackpot symbol table (or the second quasi-slot symbol table). There are three types of jackpot rounds determined by the jackpot symbol table): 7R, 10R, and 15R.

  As described above, the maximum (9R) of the big hit rounds determined in the first big hit symbol table (or the first quasi big hit symbol table) is the big hit determined in the second big hit symbol table (or the second quasi big hit symbol table). Although the value is larger than the minimum number of rounds (7R), the number of rounds (3R and 6R) other than the maximum number of big hits in the first big hit symbol table (or the first quasi big hit symbol table) is the second The value is smaller than the number of rounds (10R and 15R) other than the minimum number of big hit rounds determined in the big hit symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table), and as a whole the first big hit symbol table (or first The second big hit symbol table (or the second sub big hit symbol table) is bigger than the big hit symbol table) The probability that the number of soil is selected and determined is high.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The first big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (a), the second big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (b), the first semi-big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (c), and the second semi-big hit symbol table in FIG. 15 (d) A further modified example of will be described as an eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, the value of the number of jackpot rounds selected and determined based on the jackpot symbol determining random number (random 2 counter value) is referred to the first jackpot symbol table or the first quasi-hit symbol table). In the case where the selection and determination is made with reference to the second jackpot symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table), the probability of a large jackpot round is higher than the case where the selection is determined. is there.

  Referring to FIG. 96, the number of jackpot rounds selected and determined in the first jackpot symbol table (or the first quasi-hit symbol table) is 3R, 9R, 15R, and the second jackpot symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table). Similarly, the number of jackpot rounds selected and determined in (3) is 3R, 9R, and 15R. However, in the first jackpot symbol table (or the first quasi-hit symbol table), when the value of the random 2 counter is in the range of 0-5, the jackpot round number 3R is selected and determined, and in the case of 6-8, the jackpot The round number 9R is selected and determined. In the case of 9, the big hit round number 15R is selected and determined. Therefore, the probability that the jackpot round number 3R is selected and determined is 6/10 = 3/5, the probability that the jackpot round number 9R is selected and determined is 3/10, and the probability that the jackpot round number 15R is selected and determined is 1/10.

  On the other hand, in the case of the second jackpot symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table), when the value of the random counter 2 is 0, the jackpot random number 3R is selected and determined. Selection is determined, and in the case of 4 to 9, the big hit round number 15R is selected and determined. Accordingly, the probability that the jackpot round number 3R is selected and determined is 1/10, the probability that the jackpot round number 9R is selected and determined is 3/10, and the probability that the jackpot round number 15R is selected and determined is 6 /. 10 = 3/5.

  In this way, the selection probability of the big hit round number is made different between the first big hit symbol table (or the first quasi-hit symbol table) and the second big hit symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table). The second jackpot symbol table (or the second quasi-hit symbol table) may be configured to have a higher probability of selecting a larger jackpot round number than the jackpot symbol table (or the first quasi-hit symbol table). .

  As described above, the first big hit symbol table, the second big hit symbol table, the first sub-hit symbol table, and the second sub-hit symbol table, the first embodiment, the seventh embodiment, and the eighth embodiment. The number of changes to be executed in a specific game state (hit state) determined for the change display executed by the second change display means (the second special symbol display 8b and the second decorative symbol display 9b) The number of changes to be executed in a specific game state (hit state) that determines (the number of jackpot rounds) for the variable display executed by the first fluctuation display means (first special symbol display 8a or first decorative symbol display 9a) Compared to (large number of rounds per round), it is configured to “determine a relatively large number of rounds”.

[Ninth Embodiment]
FIG. 97 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 6 as seen from the front. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, at the lower part of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15, a special winning opening in which the opening / closing plate 16 is opened by the solenoid 16a in a specific gaming state (big hit state). Is provided. The opening / closing plate 16 is means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 19. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, a winning opening (hereinafter, also referred to as an attacker or a lower attacker) formed by opening the opening / closing plate 16 is a large winning opening, and a variable winning ball apparatus 20 (an accessory, hereinafter, an accessory). (Also referred to as a starting accessory) is released only in the starting operation, and is not opened in the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 100 is a timing diagram illustrating an example of how the gaming machine proceeds. As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, when a game ball wins the start winning opening 13, that is, when a start win occurs, a lottery is executed by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. As a result of the lottery, if the big win or the loss is determined, the special symbol and the decorative symbol fluctuate (variably display). When the change is completed, when the big hit is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, the grand prize opening (lower attacker) is controlled to open and close 2 to 15 times (2 to 15 rounds, the open permissible time of 1 round is 29 seconds). If it is determined to be out of play, the jackpot game is not executed.

  When the semi-big hit is determined, the game control means controls the accessory to the open state and starts the starting operation. When the game ball wins an accessory in the starting operation state, and the game ball wins a specific winning opening 30 and is detected by the specific area switch 30a, a V winning is generated. When the V winning is generated, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The starter (variable winning ball device 20) is controlled to be in an open state only in the start operation state. Therefore, in a game state other than those states, the game ball does not win the starter. Therefore, when a winning is detected inside the starting combination in a gaming state other than those states, the winning is not a regular winning (abnormal winning). Therefore, in this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, a notification to that effect is made and a prize ball payout based on the winning is not performed. However, as a matter of course, a regular winning is not notified and a prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the game control means turns on the second error prohibition flag when there is a possibility that a regular winning will occur, so as not to notify the abnormal winning. Control based on the second error prohibition flag will be described later.

  The big winning opening (lower attacker) is controlled to be open only in the big hit gaming state. Therefore, in a game state other than those states, the game ball does not win the big prize opening. Therefore, when a winning is detected inside the big winning opening in a gaming state other than those states, the winning is not a regular winning (abnormal winning). Therefore, in this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, a notification to that effect is made and a prize ball payout based on the winning is not performed. However, as a matter of course, a regular winning is not notified and a prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the game control means turns on the first error prohibition flag when there is a possibility that a regular winning will occur, so as not to notify the abnormal winning. Control based on the first error prohibition flag will be described later. In addition, the abnormal winning for the starting character is set as the second abnormal winning, and the abnormal winning for the lower attacker is set as the first abnormal winning.

  FIG. 101 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 31. As shown in FIG. 101, the detection signal of the count switch 19 is also input to the input driver circuit 58. The output circuit 59 also drives the solenoid 16a in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. The other configuration is the same as the configuration shown in FIG.

Hereinafter, control different from the control in the first to eighth embodiments will be described.
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process (S305) in the special symbol process in this embodiment. In S134A, the CPU 56 initializes the value of the first error number counter to 0. The first error number counter will be described later. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the accessory release pre-processing (S305a) in this embodiment. In SA414A, the CPU 56 sets a second error detection prohibition flag in order to prohibit the detection of the abnormal winning of the starting accessory. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  104 and 105 are flowcharts showing the post-completion processing (S305c) in this embodiment. The CPU 56 resets the second error detection prohibition flag at SA451A. In SA457A, the value of the second error number counter is initialized to zero. The second error number counter will be described later. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening pre-processing (S306) in this embodiment. In SA476A, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to 29 seconds in the large winning opening opening time timer indicating the opening time of the large winning opening (lower attacker). Also, the lower attacker is controlled to be in the open state at SA477A). Specifically, the solenoid 16a is driven to open the lower attacker. In SA478A, a first error detection prohibition flag is set in order to prohibit detection of abnormal winning of the lower attacker. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening process (SA307) in this embodiment. In the first big prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening time timer by -1 (SA481A). If the value of the big prize opening time timer is 0 (SA482A), that is, if the accessory opening time timer times out, the process proceeds to SA491A.

  If the big winning opening opening time timer has not timed out, it is checked whether or not the value of the winning counter is 10 (SA483). When the value of the winning number counter reaches 10, the process proceeds to SA491A. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, when the count switch 19 is turned on, that is, when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected (SA484A), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by one (SA486).

  In SA491A, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the lower attacker is controlled to be closed. The arrival monitoring time (the time until the game ball that has entered the opening / closing plate is detected by the count switch 19 has a margin). A value corresponding to the set time) is set in the arrival monitoring timer (SA492A). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening closing post-process (SA310) (SA493).

  FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the first big prize opening closing post-process (S308) in this embodiment. In the post-processing after the first big prize opening is closed, the CPU 56 decrements the arrival monitoring timer value by 1 (SA501A). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the arrival monitoring timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the arrival monitoring timer has timed out (SA502A). When the arrival monitoring timer times out, the process proceeds to SA511. If the arrival monitoring timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  In SA511, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the round number counter by -1. If the value of the round number counter is not 0, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (SA308) (SA515). When the value of the round number counter is 0, that is, when all rounds in the jackpot game have ended, the first error detection prohibition flag is reset (SA516A), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set. Then, the value is updated according to the first big hit end process (SA311) (SA517).

  FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a game ball in the game control microcomputer according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109, in the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0, the third start port switch 12a, the count switch 19, the winning port switch 40a, the winning port switch 39a, the winning port switch 38a, and the bonus item winning switch, respectively. Detection signals of 34b, the prize winning switch 34a, the first start port switch 13a, and the gate switch 32a are input. The detection signals of the second start port switch 14a, the accessory discharge switch 29a, and the specific area switch 30a are input to bits 5 to 7 of the input port 1, respectively.

  FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a prize ball number table in this embodiment. The number of processes (in this example, “8”) is set at the top address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball will be paid out by winning from the next address The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 109).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process of S341 in this embodiment. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the winning ball number table as a pointer (S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (S353).

  Then, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the data of the prize ball number table pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (S355). Further, the pointer value is increased by 1 (S356).

  If the calculation result in S355 is not 0, that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the process proceeds to S362A (S361). If the calculation result in S355 is 0, that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (S359). If it is not 0, the process returns to S354 (S360). In S361, when it is confirmed that the calculation result in S355 is 0, that is, the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to S359.

  In S362A, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the switch input bit determination value used in the process of S355 is a count switch input bit determination value. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 19 has been turned on in S361 (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the count switch 19). When the switch input bit determination value is not the count switch input bit determination value, the process proceeds to S363B. If the switch input bit determination value is the count switch input bit determination value, it is checked whether the value of the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag is 10, 11, or 14 (S362C). . If the value of the special symbol process flag is 10, 11, 13, or 14, the first big prize opening opening process in S307 or the first big prize opening closing process in S308 is executed, and the control is normally performed. If so, the grand prize opening is open. When the value of the special symbol process flag in such an open state is 10, 11, 13, or 14, the process proceeds to S364.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 10, 11, 13, or 14, the process of S364 and S365 is not executed and the process proceeds to S359. The fact that the count switch 19 is turned on when the value of the special symbol process flag is not 10, 11, 13, or 14 means that an abnormal winning to the lower attacker has occurred or the detection signal from the count switch 19 has been detected for a long time (4 ms). This means that there was a lot of noise. In other words, the regular winning of the lower attacker did not occur. Therefore, when it is detected that the special symbol process flag is not 10, 11, 13 or 14, the CPU 56 has won the lower attacker, the CPU 56 does not perform the payout based on the winning.

  The CPU 56 determines the value of the special symbol process flag in S362A, and determines whether or not an abnormal winning for the lower attacker has occurred when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a predetermined value. It may be determined whether or not the 1 error detection prohibition flag is set. In that case, when the first error detection prohibition flag is not set, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning for the lower attacker has occurred. However, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the first special symbol process flag as in this embodiment, whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. Determination process is simplified. That is, the first error detection prohibition flag need not be controlled.

  Further, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the opening / closing plate 16 and the position where the count switch 19 is installed, it is judged abnormal whether or not the control for actually opening the big winning opening (lower attacker) is being performed. When determining whether or not a winning has occurred, it is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won a lower attacker immediately before closing, after performing control to close the opening and closing plate 16. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the lower attacker to the installation position of the count switch 19. That is, it is necessary to start determining whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred after a certain period of time has passed since the control for actually closing the lower attacker. However, in this embodiment, the time required for the game ball to flow between the entrance of the lower attacker and the installation position of the count switch 19 is taken into consideration in the first post-close closing process (S308). That is, after the time elapses, the first error detection prohibition flag is set, and the first big prize closing post-processing (SA308) is ended.

  If the switch input bit is not the count switch input bit determination value, the switch input bit determination value used in the process of S355 is the accessory winning switch (34a) input bit determination value or the accessory winning switch (34b) input bit determination. It is confirmed whether or not it is a value (see FIG. 110) (S363B). Whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or 8 when it is the bonus winning switch (34a) input bit judgment value or the winning prize winning switch (34b) input bit judgment value (see FIG. 110) Confirm (S363C). That the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or 8 means that the gaming state is either the process during opening of an accessory (S305b) or the process after closing an accessory (S305c). That is, it means that the starter (variable winning ball apparatus 20) may be released when the game control is normally executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 7 or 8, the process proceeds to S359. The fact that the prize winning switch 34a or the prize winning prize switch 34b is turned on when the value of the special symbol process flag is not 7 or 8 indicates that an abnormal prize has occurred in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (starting accessory), or This means that the detection signal from the prize winning switch 34a or the prize winning switch 34b has been subjected to noise over a long period (over 4 ms). That is, the regular winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has not occurred. Therefore, when it is detected that the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has been won when the value of the special symbol process flag is not 7 or 8, the CPU 56 does not perform a payout based on the winning.

  The CPU 56 determines the value of the special symbol process flag in S363C, and determines whether or not an abnormal winning for the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has occurred when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a predetermined value. In S363C, it may be determined whether the second error detection prohibition flag is set. In this case, when the second error detection prohibition flag is not set, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning for the variable winning ball device 20 has occurred. However, when configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. That is, the second error detection prohibition flag need not be controlled.

  In S364, the prize ball number table data (in this case, the prize ball number) pointed to by the pointer is set as the prize ball addition value. Then, the prize ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (S357, S358). Then, the process proceeds to SA359.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (first abnormal winning designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning to the big winning opening (lower attacker). The command D002 (H) is an effect control command (second abnormal winning designation command) for instructing the starter (variable winning ball apparatus 20) to notify the abnormal winning. The command D003 (H) is a command (discharge abnormality notification designation command) for notifying the gaming ball discharge abnormality of the variable winning ball device 20 (starting accessory). The other effect control commands are the same as the effect control commands in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment as well, the command D002 (H) is an effect control command that instructs the variable winning ball apparatus 20 to notify the abnormal winning ball.

  113 and 114 are flowcharts showing the abnormal winning notification process of S23 in this embodiment. The processing of SA561 to S564, SA570 to SA574 is the same as in the first embodiment, but if SA563 is N, the process returns. Further, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the second error number valid period timer by -1 in SA565A. In this embodiment, an abnormal winning (second abnormal winning) for the starting combination is detected continuously within a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes), and the cumulative number of detected abnormal winnings is a predetermined number (for example, 5). Times), an abnormal winning notification is made. The second error number valid period timer is a timer for measuring a predetermined period. In SA566A, S567A, and S568A, when the value of the second error number valid period timer is 0, the value of the second error number counter (counter for counting the number of detections of the second abnormal winning prize) is set to 0, and the second If the error detection prohibition flag is set in SA569A that resets the notification completion flag, the process proceeds to SA585.

  In SA575A, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second notified flag is set. If the second notification completion flag is set, control is performed to transmit a second abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (SA580A). Then, the second error number counter is initialized to 0 (SA581A).

  If the second notified flag is not set, the value of the second error number counter is incremented by 1 (SA576A), and the second error number valid period timer is started (SA577A). That is, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) is set. When the value of the second error number counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5), the second notification completion flag is set (SA579A), and the processes of SA580A and S581A are executed.

  As in the case of the first embodiment, the second abnormal prize is detected again before the second error number effective period timer (in the first embodiment, the error number effective period timer) times out, and the second abnormality is detected. When the cumulative number of winning detections reaches 5, a second abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 80. When the second abnormal prize notification designation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 uses the effect device to generate the second abnormal prize notification effect. Do.

  Further, the second abnormal prize is continuously detected within a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) measured by the second error number valid period timer, and the cumulative number of times of detecting the second abnormal prize is a predetermined number (for example, 5). 2), the second abnormal prize winning notification is performed without using the second error number valid period timer. )), The second abnormal prize may be notified. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 makes an abnormal winning determination (SA571, SA572, SA573, SA574) when the second error detection prohibition flag is not set. As in the case of the number-of-balls adding process (see FIG. 111), the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 can be opened under normal control (for example, 7 or When a value other than 8) is shown, the second abnormal winning determination may be made.

  In SA585, if the value of the first error number valid period timer is not 0, the value of the first error number valid period timer is decremented by one. In this embodiment, abnormal winnings (first abnormal winnings) of the big winning mouth (lower attacker) are detected continuously within a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes), and the cumulative number of detected first abnormal winnings is When the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) is reached, the first abnormal prize is notified. The first error number valid period timer is a timer for measuring a predetermined period.

  When the value of the first error number valid period timer is 0 (SA586), the CPU 56 sets the value of the first error number counter (counter for counting the number of detected first abnormal prizes) to 0 (SA587). The first notified flag is reset (SA588).

  On the other hand, if the first error detection prohibition flag is not set (SA589), the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (SA590). Then, the logical product of the content of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (02 (H), see FIG. 110) is calculated (SA591). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 02 (H), that is, when the count switch 19 is on, the logical product operation result is 02 (H). When the count switch 19 is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is 0, it is determined that an abnormal winning at the big winning opening (lower attacker) has occurred. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first notified flag is set (SA595). If the notified flag is set, control is performed to transmit a first abnormal winning notification designating command to the effect control board 80 (SA600). Then, the first error number counter is initialized to 0 (SA601).

  If the first notification completion flag is not set, the value of the first error number counter is incremented by 1 (SA596), and the first error number valid period timer is started (SA597). That is, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) is set. When the value of the first error number counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5), the first notified flag is set (SA599), and the processes of SA600 and S601 are executed.

  A detection signal that indicates that a game ball has entered the big prize opening (lower attacker) when the first error detection prohibition flag is not set, unless cheating is received or noise is added to the detection signal from the switch. Is not output from the count switch 19. Therefore, when the CPU 56 determines that the detection signal is output from the count switch 19 when the first error detection prohibition flag is not set, the CPU 56 considers that an abnormal winning has occurred for the big winning opening.

  Then, when the first abnormal prize is detected again before the first error number effective period timer times out and the cumulative number of times of detection of the first abnormal prize reaches 5, the designation of the first abnormal prize notification is given to the effect control board 80. A command is sent. When the first abnormal prize notification designating command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 uses the effect device to generate the first abnormal prize notification effect. Do.

  In this embodiment, the first abnormal winning is detected continuously within a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) measured by the first error number valid period timer, and the first abnormal winning is cumulatively detected. Is configured to notify the first abnormal prize when it reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), but without using the first error number validity period timer, the cumulative number of first abnormal prizes detected. When the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) is reached, the first abnormal prize may be notified. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 makes an abnormal winning determination (SA589, SA591, SA592, SA593) when the first error detection prohibition flag is not set. As in the case of the ball number addition process (see FIG. 111), the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a state where the big winning opening (lower attacker) can be opened under normal control (for example, When a value other than 10, 11, 13, or 14) is shown, the first abnormal winning determination may be made.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a part of the command analysis process (SA704) executed by the effect control CPU 101 in this embodiment. In SA645A and S646A, if the received effect control command is the second abnormal prize notification designation command, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag. In SA645 and S646, if the effect control command received is the first abnormal prize notification designation command, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The decorative symbol process is the same as the decorative symbol process in the first embodiment, but in this embodiment, whether or not the abnormality notification flag or the discharge abnormality notification flag by the effect control CPU 101 is set. It is determined whether the first abnormality notification flag, the second abnormality notification flag, or the discharge abnormality notification flag is set instead of the determination process (the process of S835A in FIG. 77 and the process of S845A in FIG. 80).

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in this embodiment. FIG. 116 (A) shows an example of an initial screen displayed on the effect display device 9 by the effect control CPU 101 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 116 (B) shows an example of a power failure recovery screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the power failure recovery designation command. FIG. 116 (C) shows an example of the first abnormality notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the first abnormal prize notification designation command by the effect control CPU 101, and the variation of the decorative pattern is shown. Even if is started, it is shown that the display of the first abnormality notification screen is continued (see the right side of FIG. 116C). FIG. 116 (D) shows an example of the second abnormality notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the second abnormal prize notification designation command by the effect control CPU 101, and the variation of the decorative pattern is shown. It is shown that the display of the second abnormality notification screen is continued even if is started (see the right side of FIG. 116D). FIG. 116 (E) shows an example of the discharge abnormality notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the discharge abnormality notification designation command by the effect control CPU 101, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started. However, it is shown that the display of the discharge abnormality notification screen is continued (see the right side of FIG. 116 (E)).

  117 and 118 are flowcharts showing the notification control process of S710 in this embodiment. In the notification control process, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not a first abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that the first abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set (S906A). If not set, the process proceeds to S916. If the first abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the first abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (S907A), and the effect display device 9 displays the screen displayed at that time. Then, a command to superimpose and display the first abnormality notification screen is output to the VDP 109 (S908A). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays the first abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the command (see FIG. 116C).

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the notification of the first abnormal winning prize to the sound output board 70 (S909A). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, thereafter, sound output (output of abnormality notification sound) according to the notification of the first abnormal winning is performed. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a first abnormality notification flag indicating that the first abnormality notification is being performed (S910A).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that the second abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set (S916). If not set, the process proceeds to S921. If the second abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag is set, the second abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag is reset (S917), and the effect display device 9 displays the screen displayed at that time. Then, a command to superimpose and display the second abnormality notification screen is output to the VDP 109 (S918). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays the second abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the command (see FIG. 116D).

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output in response to the notification of the second abnormal prize to the sound output board 70 (S919). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of an abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of the second abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a second abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (S920). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The effect control CPU 101 notifies the abnormality when the abnormal winning for the start occurs (second abnormality notification by the processing of S908A and S909A) and the abnormality notification when the abnormal winning regarding the second big prize opening occurs ( The abnormality notification is performed so as to be distinguishable from the second abnormality notification by the processing of S918 and S919 (see FIG. 116).

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect and the sound effect by the speaker 27 in the effect display device 9 in this embodiment. FIG. 119 (A) shows an example when the decorative display is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. FIG. 119 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 119 (C) shows an example in which the effect display device 9 is notified of the first abnormal winning or the second abnormal winning, and the speaker 27 outputs an abnormal notification sound. When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first abnormal prize notification designation command or the second abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the production abnormality display screen 9 displays the first abnormality notification screen or the second abnormality notification screen. And a control for outputting an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. Even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the first abnormality notification screen or the second abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 To continue.

  Moreover, when the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbol is finished, the stop symbol is continuously displayed on the effect display device 9. Therefore, when the variable display of the symbol is started after the abnormality notification screen is displayed on the effect display device 9, the first abnormality notification screen or the second abnormality notification screen is deleted. However, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 continues. When the first abnormal winning notification designation command or the second abnormal winning notification designation command is received again, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the first abnormality notification screen or the second abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 again. To do. In this embodiment, after the cumulative number of detections of the first abnormal prize or the second abnormal prize reaches the predetermined number and the abnormality notification command is transmitted, it is determined that the first abnormal prize or the second abnormal prize has occurred even once. Then, the first abnormal winning notification designation command or the second abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted (see SA579A, S575A, S580A in FIG. 113, and SA599, SA595, SA600 in FIG. 114). Therefore, even when the variable display of symbols is started and the abnormality notification screen is erased, the first abnormality notification screen or the second abnormality notification screen is displayed on the effect display device 9 each time an abnormal winning is repeatedly generated. Therefore, in a situation where the first abnormal winning is repeatedly performed or the second abnormal winning is generated, even if the decorative symbols are variably displayed, the abnormality display screen is displayed on the repeated effect display device 9 and the repeated abnormal winning is generated. Is easily recognized.

[Tenth embodiment]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating the SA23 abnormal winning notification process in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 checks in SA569B whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 6, and if it is less than 6, executes a process of determining whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred. To do. Other processing is the same as the processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 66).

  In the first embodiment, a state in which the value of the special symbol process flag is not 7, 8, 10, 11, or 14 is a state in which the control for opening the variable winning ball device 20 (the accessory) is not executed. (See FIG. 27). In such a state, the fact that a game ball has been detected by either the prize winning switch 34a or the prize winning switch 34b means that an abnormal prize has occurred in the prize, or that the prize winning switch 34a or the prize winning prize has occurred. This means that the detection signal from the switch 34b has been subjected to noise over a long period (over 4 ms). Therefore, when it is detected that the prize winning switch 34a or the prize winning switch 34b is turned on in a state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 6, a process for determining whether or not an abnormal prize has occurred is performed. Make it run. As in this embodiment, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by comparing the value of the special symbol process flag with one numerical value, it is necessary to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred. The control burden is further simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that a plurality of game balls have abnormally won in an accessory, it transmits an abnormal prize notification designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, when it is detected that one game ball has been won abnormally, an abnormal winning notification designation command may be transmitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects abnormal winnings and discharging abnormalities for a predetermined period (a period during which the initialization notification is executed) after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Otherwise, the abnormal prize notification designation command and the discharge abnormality notification designation command are not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the value of the accessory control process flag or the special symbol process flag is not when the variable winning ball apparatus 20 can be opened under normal control, or the error detection prohibition flag. When no is set, an abnormal winning and discharging abnormality is always detected, and the production control microcomputer 100 starts an abnormal winning notification designation command or discharge abnormality notification designation within a predetermined period after power supply to the gaming machine is started. When a command is received, notification of abnormal winning or discharging abnormality may not be performed.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification (abnormal winning notification and discharge abnormality notification), so that a situation may occur in which the initialization notification becomes difficult to recognize. Is prevented. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an initialization designation command when a user reset that causes the program to start executing from the top address (for example, address 0000) occurs, even when power supply to the game machine is started. As a cause of the occurrence of the user reset, for example, when the watchdog timer is configured to be used, there is a case where the watchdog timer has timed out due to an illegal action that hinders the smooth progress of the program. Such fraudulent acts are likely to occur particularly when the game is configured to be controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the big hit determination random number. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized, and a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number is initialized, and it is easy to receive an illegal act that makes it easy to grasp the count value of the counter. By making the initialization notice conspicuous as in this embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside of the gaming machine that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has been initialized. Is easily recognized.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the symbol display 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board.

  FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a configuration in which a sound / lamp control board 80b and a symbol control board 80a are provided as other boards. The sound / lamp control board 80b is equipped with a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b including a sound / lamp control CPU 101b for controlling the lamp and the speaker 27. The design control board 80a controls the effect display device 9. A symbol control microcomputer 100a including a symbol control CPU 101a is mounted. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560, and the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b transmits the command to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In this case, the command from the game control microcomputer 560 may simply pass through another board (sound / lamp control board 80b), or the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may have received the command. Accordingly, control related to voice control and lamp control may be executed, and the received command may be transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a as it is or after being changed to a simplified command, for example. Even in such a case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with a command received from the sound / lamp control board 80b.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As explained based on FIG. 15, FIG. 95, FIG. 96, the variation display executed by the second variation display means (second special symbol display 8b or second decorative symbol display 9b) is determined. The number of changes to the first state of the special variable winning device 20 executed in the specific game state (big win state) is the first variation display means (the first special symbol display 8a and the first decorative symbol display 9a). Change to the first state of the special variable winning device 20 (or the big winning opening by the opening / closing plate 16 of the ninth embodiment) executed in the specific gaming state (big hit state) determined for the variable display executed in Since the number of times is relatively larger than the number of times, the first variation display means (first special symbol display 8a or first decorative symbol display 9a) and second variation display means (second special symbol display) 8b and the second decorative symbol display 9b) The skill can be diversified and the interest is improved.

  (2) When the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is not controlled to the starting operation state or the specific gaming state, an abnormal winning occurs based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the accessory winning switch 34a or the accessory winning switch 34b. And when the variable winning ball apparatus 20 changes to the open state, it is determined that the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has been discharged from the variable winning ball apparatus 20. Since it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the winning switch 34a or the accessory winning switch 34b, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred even though the regular game is being executed. This has the effect of being able to avoid and reliably detect and notify that an abnormal winning has occurred.

  (3) When a game ball is detected by the count switch 19 in a gaming state other than the big hit state in which the big winning opening (attacker) by the opening / closing plate 16 is controlled to be in an open state, an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (attacker) is made. Because it is determined that it has occurred, it is possible to avoid the abnormal winning even though the regular winning game is being executed, and to reliably detect that an abnormal winning has occurred. Can be notified.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 116, it is configured to perform abnormality notification so that an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (attacker) by the opening / closing plate 16 can be distinguished. Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish between the abnormal winning with respect to the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the abnormal winning with respect to the big winning opening (attacker).

  (5) Specific display on either the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b without requiring a game ball to be awarded to the special area 30 in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the starting operation state. Even when the result is derived and displayed, since the variable winning ball device 20 is in the open state, the variability of the game can be improved and the interest is improved.

  (6) Second variation display means (second special symbol display device 8b or second decorative symbol display device 9b) that makes it easy for a game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 when in a high probability state (probability variation state). Is in a state in which it is easy to display the variation, and when the specific display result (big hit display result) is derived and displayed by the variation display, the first variation display means (the first special symbol display 8a and the first decorative symbol display 9a) Compared with the case where the specific display result (big hit display result) is derived and displayed by the variable display, the number of times the special variable winning device 20 changes to the first state is relatively large. As a result, the player is discouraged as much as possible from the occurrence of a specific gaming state (big hit state) with a small number of changes to the first state of the special variable prize-winning device 20 in the high probability state (probability variation state). Can be prevented. That is, if two round big hits such as a probabilistic big hit or a small hit occur in the probable state, so many pachinko balls do not win during the big hit, and the player cannot obtain many prize balls. However, the player is discouraged by obtaining a relatively small number of prize balls in spite of being in a state of probability change. However, when a big hit is generated in the probability variation state, a big hit of 15 rounds (usually a big hit or a probability variation big hit) is more likely to occur than a sudden probability big hit or a small hit.

  (7) As shown in the first jackpot symbol table and the second jackpot symbol table in FIG. 15, the jackpot gaming state based on the display result on the first special symbol indicator 8a and the display on the second special symbol indicator 8b Since the number of rounds is individually selected and determined together with the display result of the symbol variation display in the big hit gaming state based on the result, variations of the game can be enriched.

  (8) When it is determined that an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (attacker) by the opening / closing plate 16 have occurred, execution of the control for paying out the game ball based on the abnormal winning is prohibited. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the winning determination means has input a detection signal due to fraud, it is possible to prevent the game store from being disadvantaged by not paying out the winning ball based on the winning.

  (9) When the data indicating the game progress status (first and second special symbol process flag) indicates a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 6, 9, 12, 13, 15), the winning determination means detects Since it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the signal, it can be appropriately determined whether or not it is an abnormal winning according to the gaming state.

  (10) Even if a predetermined time elapses after the game winning CPU 56 changes to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 20, the number of detection signals from the winning prize winning switches 34a and 34b and the winning action discharging switch 29a Since the discharge abnormality notification command is transmitted and the discharge abnormality notification is performed based on the discharge abnormality notification command when it is determined that the number of detection signals from is not the same, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 It can be notified that the game ball is staying at.

  (11) Even if a predetermined time elapses after the variable winning ball apparatus 20 changes to the closed state, the number of detection signals from the accessory winning switch 34a, 34b and the number of detection signals from the accessory discharge switch 29a Since it is determined that a discharge abnormality has occurred and the game is stopped when they are not the same, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is prevented from continuing the game while the game ball is retained. .

  (12) The number of big hits determined for the big hit state that occurs when a game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 20 controlled to the starting operation state wins the special area 30 Since the player is notified of the advance notice, an interesting game can be provided.

  (13) The first special symbol as shown in FIG. 8 for the probability variable big hit and the normal big hit and the sudden probability variable big hit that are different in at least one of the period and the number of times that the special variable winning device 20 is changed to the open state in the big hit gaming state. In the determination of the variable display executed by the display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, respectively, the jackpot gaming state is determined based on the determination probabilities in which the ratio determined when controlling to the high probability state is different. S62 of FIG. 32 in the first special symbol process, or the second special symbol process, which of the plurality of game states including the probability variable big hit, the normal big hit, and the sudden probability variable big hit is controlled. The game using the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is determined by the same processing in FIG. It can be diversified. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8, in the determination about the variable display executed by the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the probability of determining to control to the high probability state is the same. Therefore, since the game content is not biased to any one of the special symbol displays, the game can be diversified so that the fun of the game is not impaired. Here, as a specific example of the game content being biased to one of the special symbol displays, continuous occurrence of jackpots frequently occurs in one special symbol display, It means that a predetermined gaming state is biased and generated on the side of one special symbol display, such as no continuous occurrence of big hits. Further, as shown in N of S560 of FIG. 52 or Y of S284 of FIG. 91, N of S563 of FIG. 52 or Y of S288 of FIG. 91, S564C of FIG. 52 or S289 of FIG. When the game ball is determined to be in the closed state, an abnormal winning notification is made based on the detection of the winning of the game ball. As a result, fraudulent acts on the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in S906 to S909 in FIG. 72 and S845A and S845C in FIG. 80, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect display device 9 even when such abnormal winning notification is being executed. Even when an abnormal winning notification is made due to a malfunction, the variable display is not stopped and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. Further, since an abnormality notification is performed based on the detection of a game ball winning to the special variable winning device 20 in a gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, an abnormal winning has occurred due to an illegal act on the special variable winning device 20. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act on the special variable winning device 20. In addition, as shown in S906 to S909 in FIG. 72 and S845A and S845C in FIG. 80, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect display device 9 even when such abnormality notification is being executed. Even when an abnormal prize is notified due to a malfunction, the variable display is not stopped, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  (14) As described in FIG. 8, the second probability change big hit determination table has a lower rate of sudden probability change big hit than the second normal time big hit determination table. 2 With regard to the variable display on the special symbol display 8b, the probability of suddenly changing to the big change gaming state as a big hit gaming state is lower than the probability in the normal state. Thereby, in the high probability state, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened by 2R in an extremely short time, and after the big hit gaming state, the probability of a sudden probability variable big hit controlled to the high probability state is lower than the normal state. In a high-probability state, sudden probabilistic jackpots can be controlled to reduce the player's awakening. Further, when in the high probability state, the fluctuation in the second special symbol display 8b is executed based on winning in the second start winning opening 14, which makes it easier for the game ball to win than in the normal state. As for the display, the probability of suddenly controlling the probability change is reduced, so that the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has a large number of rounds in the specific game state generated based on the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b. Since it is easy to become a game, it becomes easier for a player to win a game ball that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved, and the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning ball device 20 is increased. be able to. Thereby, the number of balls can be increased.

  (15) As shown in FIG. 79, the second probability change big hit determination table has a higher rate of sudden probability change big hit than the second normal time big hit determination table. 2 With regard to the variable display on the special symbol display 8b, the probability of determining to control to the high probability transition specific game state as the specific game state is higher than the probability in the normal state. Thereby, when in the high probability state, the fluctuation in the second special symbol display 8b is executed based on winning in the second starting winning opening 14, which makes it easier for the game ball to win than in the normal state. As for the display, the probability of suddenly controlling the probability change is reduced, so that the variable winning ball apparatus 20 has a small number of rounds in the specific game state generated based on the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b. Since it is easy to become a game, it is not easy to win game balls excessively, so that the number of game balls to be won in the variable winning ball device 20 can be suppressed so as not to increase too much. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of balls from being increased excessively.

  (16) When selecting a shortened variation pattern when the number of reserved memories exceeds a predetermined number, the number of reserved memories on the first special symbol display 8a side and the number of reserved memories on the second special symbol display side When it is determined whether or not the number of shortened variation patterns has been selected individually, the shortened variation pattern is selected in one special symbol display, but the shortened variation pattern is not selected in the other special symbol display. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable due to the situation where the control is biased. However, when the sum of the number of reserved memories on the first special symbol display 8a side and the number of reserved memories on the second special symbol display 8b side is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the shortened variation pattern is selected. Therefore, when the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the shortened variation pattern is selected regardless of the variation display on any of the special symbol display devices, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable as described above. Can be performed.

  (17) In FIG. 8, the ratio of the first probability change big hit determination table is smaller than the first normal time big hit determination table, and the second probability change big hit determination table is the second normal. As explained that the percentage of small hits is lower than the time big hit determination table, when in the high probability state, the probability of determining to control the big hit as the big hit gaming state is the probability in the normal state. Low compared. Further, in FIG. 79, the ratio of the first probability change big hit determination table is smaller than the first normal time big hit determination table, and the second probability change big hit determination table is the second normal time. As explained that the percentage of small hits is higher than the big hit determination table, when in a high probability state, the probability of determining to control the big hit as a big hit gaming state is compared with the probability in the normal state Is expensive. As a result, the ratio of small hits can be matched to the ratio of suddenly probable big hits.

  (18) As shown in S1315 and S1316 in FIG. 89 in the second embodiment, S339 and S340 in FIG. 92 in the fourth embodiment, and S1317 in FIG. 93 in the fifth embodiment, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed. Since it is determined that the game ball winning is detected when it is determined that the state is in a state, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b by the winning is prohibited. When there is a possibility that a game ball has won a prize in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to reliably prevent a transition to the big hit gaming state.

  (19) As shown in S363A and 363B of FIG. 64, when it is determined that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, a game based on the winning based on the detection of the winning of the game ball is detected. Since the execution of the control for paying out the ball is prohibited, if there is a possibility that the game ball has won a prize in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 due to fraudulent acts, the game place is not allowed to be paid out based on the winning. Profit can be prevented from being given.

(20) A game ball that has won the second start winning opening based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening when it is determined that the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state. 52 is stored in the start opening abnormality counter, and as shown in S564B and S564C in FIG. 52, when the value of the start opening abnormality counter becomes equal to or larger than a predetermined value, it is determined whether or not it is in an abnormal winning state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormal winning state from being determined due to a minor abnormality temporarily caused by noise or the like, and it is possible to reliably determine the abnormal winning state.

  (21) As shown in S362A and 362B of FIG. 64, based on the detection of a winning game ball to the variable winning ball device 20 in a gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, the gaming ball due to the winning is paid out Since execution of the control is prohibited, if there is a possibility that a game ball has won a prize in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 due to an illegal act, a disadvantage is given to the game hall so as not to pay out the winning ball based on the winning. Can be prevented.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27 and the like) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 4 (a sound / lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function by a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (3) The pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variation display unit based on the start winning prize becomes a predetermined symbol. Pachinko machines that will be released based on the start prize, but if there is a prize in a predetermined area of the electric game that will be released based on the start prize, The present invention is applied even to a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol displayed in a variable manner becomes a predetermined symbol combination. it can. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, when the game ball wins the third start winning opening 12, it is different from when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14. The example which performs the control which performs the fluctuation | variation display used as a reach was shown (refer description of the fluctuation | variation pattern of FIGS. 18-21). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game ball wins the third start winning opening 12, unlike the case where the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, for example, it is a big hit. The effect display device 9 may always perform a predetermined notice display such as a jackpot notice display (which may be a notice that the player will reach reach) or the like. Further, when the game ball wins the third start winning opening 12, a special reach effect that is not displayed when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is always displayed. May be. Further, when the game ball wins the third start winning opening 12, a special character that is not displayed when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is always displayed. Also good. As described above, when the game ball wins the third start winning opening 12, a special effect that is not performed when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is performed. do it.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, when the game ball wins the third start winning port 12, it fluctuates with priority over when the game ball wins the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port 14. An example of performing control to execute display has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game ball wins the third start winning opening 12, the game ball follows the order of winning in the same manner as when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14. You may make it perform control which performs a fluctuation display.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, it is determined based on the order of winning game balls to the first start winning opening 13 to the third start winning opening 12 and the priority of the variable display for the start winning opening. According to the order of the variable display, an example is shown in which the special symbol variable display is performed on either the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be used as long as one of them can perform special symbol variation display when performing special symbol variation display. , Fluctuation display based on hold storage may be performed in any hold storage order.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the first big hit symbol table and the second big hit shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) when the probability change big hit other than the sudden probability change and the normal big hit. An example in which the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds per jackpot are selected and determined individually for the first special symbol and the second special symbol using the symbol table is shown. Such selection and determination of the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of jackpot that are performed separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be performed only in the probability variation state (high probability state), or in the normal state (low probability). (State) may be performed only in the probability state (high probability state) and normal state (low probability state). In addition, the selection determination of the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of jackpot that are separately performed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be performed only when the probability variation big hit other than the sudden probability change, You may make it carry out only when it is usually a big hit.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the first big hit symbol table and the second big hit shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) when the probability change big hit other than the sudden probability change and the normal big hit. An example in which the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds per jackpot are selected and determined individually for the first special symbol and the second special symbol using the symbol table is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is 3 rounds or more, such as 15 rounds (for example, rounds of sudden chance change big hits) The number of rounds may be set to a predetermined number).

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds per jackpot are separately set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol for the case when the probability variation jackpot other than sudden probability variation and the normal jackpot. An example in which the number of rounds to be executed is selected from a plurality of different types of round numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol when selecting and deciding is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds to be executed may be selected from the same plurality of types of round numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In that case, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have different probabilities of selecting each of a plurality of types of round numbers, and the probabilities of selecting each of a plurality of types of round numbers are the same. It may be made to become.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, the second special symbol big hit symbol and the big hit number of rounds are selected and determined when the probability variation big hit other than the sudden probability change and the normal big hit are selected. An example in which the number of rounds to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of rounds at the same rate when a game ball is won at the start winning opening 14 and when a game ball is won at the third start winning opening 12 is shown. It was. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the number of rounds of the big hit are selected and determined, when the game ball wins the second start winning port 14 and when the game ball enters the third start winning port 12 The number of rounds to be executed may be selected from a plurality of types of rounds at different rates depending on when the player wins.

  (11) As described above, when there is an abnormal winning notification to be performed when it is determined that there has been an abnormal winning in the normal variable winning ball device 15, and there has been an abnormal winning in the variable winning ball device 20. The notification manner may be the same as or different from the abnormal winning notification performed when the determination is made. In addition, when it is determined that there has been an abnormal winning to the normal variable winning ball device 15, it is performed when it is determined that there has been an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball device 20 and the notification of the abnormal winning. As described above, the abnormal winning notification is performed by the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27, as well as the notification using only the effect display device 9, the effect display device 9, and a light emitting device such as a lamp / LED. Other notification modes such as notification using the display, notification using the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, and a light emitting device such as a lamp / LED may be used.

  (12) When it is determined that there has been an abnormal winning to the ordinary variable winning ball device 15 and when it is determined that there has been an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball device 20 When different notification modes are used for notification of abnormal winnings to be performed, the notification means may be selected so that the notification means such as lamps used for notification by the notification of abnormal winning is different. . Further, in the case where the notification mode is changed in this way, when the same notification means is used, the notification mode is changed by adding a strength to the degree of appeal of the notification, such as changing the notification mode depending on the intensity of light emission of the lamp. May be different.

  (13) As a gaming machine, when a special display result (for example, a probable variation symbol) of a specific display result (a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on a variable display device, the game machine is in a normal state after the specific gaming state is ended. A gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state (for example, a probable variation state) in which the variation display of identification information tends to be a specific display result, and the predetermination means derives a display result as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state Determined before display (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 corresponds to steps S82 and S83 in the first special symbol process and steps S82 and S83 in the first special symbol process in the second special symbol process. And the game control means sends a variation display command (variation pattern command) based on the determination by the prior decision means. Fluctuation display command selection means to be selected (for example, a part for executing steps S300 and S301 in the first special symbol process in the game control microcomputer 560. In the second special symbol process, the step in the first special symbol process) A display result command transmission unit (for example, for game control) that transmits a display result command (for example, a display result specifying command) that can specify a determination result by the prior determination unit) A part for executing steps S110 to S118 in the first special symbol process in the microcomputer 560. A part for executing processes corresponding to steps S110 to S118 in the first special symbol process in the second special symbol process) Including The dynamic display command selection means, as the variable display command, a non-specific variable display command (for example, a variation pattern command dedicated to loss) that can specify a non-specific display result (for example, a loss symbol) indicating that control is not performed in a specific gaming state. , Special variation display commands (for example, variation pattern commands dedicated to probability variation jackpots) that can identify special display results (for example, probability variation symbols), and non-special display results that are specific display results but not special display results (for example, non-probability variation symbols) Non-special variation display command (for example, variation pattern command dedicated to normal jackpots) and specific variation display command (for example, variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpots) that can identify special display results or non-special display results The variable display command transmission means selects the variable display command. The variable display command selected by the command selection means is transmitted (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S302 in the first special symbol process and processing corresponding to step S302 in the second special symbol process). ), The effect control means, based on the change display command or the display result command, the identification information determination means for determining the identification information to be derived and displayed as the display result on the change display device from a plurality of types (for example, the effect control microcomputer) When the specific variation display command is received (for example, Y in step S830) and the display result command cannot be received (for example, step S817). N), identification information Display results determined in a non-special display results (e.g. performance control microcomputer 100 executes the step S832) it may be configured so. According to such a configuration, the variable display command selection means can specify a non-specific variable display command that can specify a non-specific display result indicating that control is not performed in a specific gaming state and a special display result as a variable display command. Special display commands, non-special display commands that can specify non-special display results that are specific display results but not special display results, and specific display commands that can specify special display results or non-special display results When the identification information determination means receives the specific variation display command and fails to receive the display result command, the identification information determination means is configured to determine the display result of the identification information as a non-special display result. Therefore, even if the production control means cannot receive the display result command, the player can recognize whether or not a specific gaming state occurs. . Also, by including information that can specify the display result in the variable display command, the effect control means can use the identification information without receiving the display result command without using a command other than the variable display command and the display result command. Since the display result can be determined, the types of commands transmitted by the game control means do not increase, and as a result, the control burden on the game control means does not increase.

  (14) The game control means (game control microcomputer 560) includes a numerical value update means for updating a predetermined numerical value (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S24 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a predetermined time. Numerical value extraction means (for example, game control) for extracting a numerical value from the numerical value updating means (for example, when a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the third starting winning opening 12) In the microcomputer 560, the variation of the identification information based on the numerical value extracted by the numerical value extracting means) and the portion corresponding to step S113 in the first special symbol process and the step S113 in the second special symbol process. Display result determining means for determining information capable of specifying the display result of display (for example, game system In the microcomputer 560, a part for executing steps S64, S65, S82, and S83) and an initialization means for executing an initialization process for setting a numerical value to an initial value when power supply to the gaming machine is started ( For example, in the game control microcomputer 560, a part for executing the process of step S12) and an initialization command (for example, an initialization designation) indicating the execution of the initialization process when the initialization means executes the initialization process. Command) for transmitting the command (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, the part for executing the process of step S13), and the effect control means transmits the initialization command transmitted by the initialization command transmission means. On the basis of the above, a predetermined end condition (for example, elapse of a predetermined period) Initialization notification means for performing initialization notification indicating that the initialization processing has been executed until it is established (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the processing of steps S631 to S632C) and including initialization notification When the means is performing initialization notification, abnormality notification prohibiting means for prohibiting the start of abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means (for example, the processing of steps S44, S45, S551 to S553 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560). May be provided. According to such a configuration, since the abnormality notification prohibiting means for prohibiting the start of the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means is provided when the initialization notification means is performing the initialization notification, the initialization notification is a winning abnormality. It is executed in preference to the notification, and it can be reliably recognized outside the gaming machine that an initial value is set to a numerical value that determines information that can identify the display result of the variation display of the identification information.

  (15) Further, the gaming machine includes an effect display device (for example, an effect display device 9) that performs effect display as an effect device, and the game control means (game control microcomputer 560) includes first variation display means and On condition that the variation display of the identification information is not executed by the second variation display means (for example, 0 after the first special symbol process flag and “N” in the process of step S323), When the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit starts the variation display of the identification information in response to the establishment of the variation display start condition of the identification information on the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit, A fluctuation display means specifying command (for example, a special symbol specifying command) that can specify which of the first fluctuation display means and the second fluctuation display means is to start the fluctuation display of the identification information. (First symbol variation designation command and second symbol variation designation command)), variation display command for identifying variation display time (for example, variation pattern command), and display result command for identifying display result (for example, display result) A part for executing steps S467 and S110 to S118 in the first special symbol process in the game control microcomputer 560. In the second special symbol process, The effect control means is specified by the change display means specifying command on the effect display device based on the command transmitted by the start command transmission means. The portion corresponding to the processing of steps S467 and S110 to S118 is executed). An effect corresponding to the fluctuation display means is started (for example, the step (S821, S823, S825, and S826 are executed). A variation display means specifying command capable of specifying which of the first variation display means and the second variation display means the variation display of the identification information is started by the game control means, and a variation for identifying the variation display time Since the display command and the start command transmission means for transmitting the display result command for specifying the display result to the effect control means are included, the variable display pattern command and the display result specifying command for specifying the display result are displayed in the first variable display. Fluctuation display means that can be used in common for the fluctuation display of the identification information on the means and the fluctuation display of the identification information on the second fluctuation display means, and the effect control means is the effect display device and is specified by the change display means specifying command When an effect corresponding to is started, the types of commands transmitted from the game control means can be prevented from increasing.

  (16) In the first embodiment, when the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 13A to 13D is in the probability variation state as the high probability state, it is executed by the second special symbol display 8b. The data is set so that the probability of suddenly changing to the big hit gaming state as the big hit gaming state is lower than the probability in the normal state as the low probability state. An example is shown. However, in this modification, in the jackpot determination table, when the probability variation state as the high probability state is set, the variation display executed by the second special symbol display 8b is suddenly changed to the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot gaming state. Data is set so that the probability of determining to control becomes higher than the probability in the normal state as the low probability state.

  In the jackpot determination table of this modification, the table corresponding to (a) and (b) of FIG. 13 used for the first special symbol and (c) and (d) of FIG. 13 used for the second special symbol are used. In the corresponding table, data is set so that the probability of selecting a probability variation jackpot that becomes a high probability state combining the probability variation jackpot and the sudden probability variation jackpot becomes the same probability. For example, in the big hit determination table used for the first special symbol, the determination value for selecting the probability variation big hit and the sudden probability change big hit in the first normal big hit determination table corresponding to FIG. 13A used in the normal state. The total number is 50. On the other hand, in the big hit determination table used for the second special symbol, the probability variation big hit and the sudden probability variation big hit are selected in the first normal time big hit determination table corresponding to FIG. 13C used in the normal state. The total number of determination values is 50. Further, in the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the determination value for selecting the probability variation big hit and the sudden probability variation big hit in the first probability variation big hit determination table corresponding to FIG. 13B used in the probability variation state. The total number is 100. On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol, the probability variation big hit and the sudden probability variation big hit are selected in the first probability variation big hit determination table corresponding to FIG. 13D used in the probability variation state. The total number of determination values is 100.

  In the jackpot determination table shown in this modified example, when the probability change state as a high probability state, the probability of suddenly determining the jackpot gaming state to be the jackpot gaming state as the probability winning big hit is the normal probability as a low probability state. Data is set so as to be higher than the probability in the state. For example, in the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting the sudden probability change jackpot in the first probability change jackpot determination table corresponding to (b) of FIG. While the number is 60, the number of determination values for selecting suddenly probable big hits in the first normal big hit determination table corresponding to (a) of FIG. 13 used in the normal state is 20. In the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting suddenly probable jackpots in the second jackpot determination table corresponding to (d) of FIG. 13 used in the probability variation state is 80. On the other hand, the number of determination values for selecting the sudden probability variation big hit in the second normal big hit determination table corresponding to FIG. 13C used in the normal state is thirty. Therefore, when the high probability state, the variation display on the special symbol display 8b that is executed based on the winning to the second start winning opening 14, which makes it easier to win the game ball than in the normal state, Suddenly the probability of deciding to control at a probable big hit increases. Thereby, in the specific game state generated based on the variable display on the special symbol display 8b, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 tends to have a small number of rounds, so that it is not easy to win a game ball excessively.

  Further, in the jackpot determination table of this modification, when the probability change state as the high probability state, the probability of determining to control the jackpot gaming state as the jackpot gaming state is the normal probability as the low probability state. Data is set so as to be higher than the probability. For example, in the big hit determination table used for the first special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting the small hit in the first positive change big hit determination table corresponding to (b) of FIG. On the other hand, the number of determination values for selecting a small hit in the first normal big hit determination table corresponding to (a) of FIG. 13 used in the normal state is 20. In the big hit determination table used for the second special symbol, the number of determination values for selecting a small hit in the second positive change big hit determination table of FIG. 13 (d) used when the probability change state is 40. On the other hand, the number of determination values for selecting a small hit in the second normal big hit determination table of FIG. 13C used in the normal state is 30.

  In the jackpot determination table of this modified example, when the probability change state is a high probability state, the probability of suddenly determining the jackpot gaming state to be the jackpot gaming state of the probability winning jackpot is the normal probability as the low probability state. An example is shown in which data is set so as to be lower than the probability in the state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control to the big hit gaming state of sudden probability change big hit may be the same in the probability changing state as the high probability state and the normal state as the low probability state.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, the notification of the number of jackpot rounds is shown, but in addition to this, the notification of the occurrence of jackpots may be given. Furthermore, the type of jackpot, such as whether the jackpot generated is a probable big hit or a normal jackpot, may be notified in advance.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the types of jackpots that are generated are the same for the jackpot and the quasi-jacket, but the types of jackpots may be different. For example, as the big hit that occurs after the quasi-big hit, only the normal big hit or only the normal big hit and the probable big hit may be used.

  (18) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the front view which looked at the game board from the front. It is a front view which shows the structural example of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a perspective view which expands and shows a winning stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of how to advance the game of a gaming machine. It is a timing diagram showing an example of how to advance the game of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the game state changes when the special symbol is changed based on the start winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit determination value. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type of the 1st, 2nd special symbol, and the hit | offset | difference type of the 1st, 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows the 1st, 2nd jackpot symbol table, the 1st, 2nd quasi-hit symbol table, and the 1st, 2nd missed symbol table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state change when an accessory is controlled to an open state based on a semi-big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal big hit / semi big hit fluctuation pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a probability variation big hit / semi big hit variation pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a sudden probability variation big hit / semi-big hit variation pattern table. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing diagram showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal constituting a control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd start port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a 1st, 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of the stop symbol and round number determination process shown to S83 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process in a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st reserved memory number transmission process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory release middle. It is a flowchart which shows a post-completion process. It is a flowchart which shows a post-completion process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st grand prize opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big winning opening opening process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big winning opening closing post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st small hit | end process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the open pattern of the change time of a normal symbol, and a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal electric accessory operating process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout control signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a payout control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the buffer used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the fluctuation | variation display of a decorative design (a 1st decorative design and a 2nd decorative design). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display state of a total pending storage display part. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st decoration symbol display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding memory | storage display control process in an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the condition of the display effect in a variable display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory operating process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process in 5th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the winning stage 1200 by 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st, 2nd jackpot symbol table and the 1st, 2nd quasi-hit symbol table in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st, 2nd jackpot symbol table and the 1st, 2nd quasi-hit symbol table in 8th Embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine of 9th Embodiment from the front. It is the front view which looked at the game board of 9th Embodiment from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of how to advance the game of the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. It is a timing diagram showing an example of how to advance the game of the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of the game control board (main board | substrate) of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory release pre-process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the post-process closing process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the post-process closing process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st grand prize opening pre-processing in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during 1st big prize opening opening in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning opening closing post-process in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control of 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the prize ball number table in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number addition process in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormal prize alerting | reporting process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormal prize alerting | reporting process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on the variable display apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control process in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the condition of the display effect in a variable display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormal prize alerting | reporting process in 10th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure by which the sound / lamp control board and the symbol control board were provided.

Explanation of symbols

  13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 1st special symbol display, 1 pachinko machine, 32 gate, 15 variable winning ball apparatus, 20 special variable winning ball apparatus , 14a Second start port switch, 56 CPU, 560 Game control microcomputer, 9 effect display device, 101 effect control CPU, 100 effect control microcomputer, 54 ROM, 29a accessory discharge switch, 30a specific area switch, 34a, 34b Award winning switch.

Claims (4)

First start of variable display based on a first start area provided in the game area, a second start area provided in the game area, and a game ball winning in the first start area The first variation display means for starting the variation display of the first identification information when the condition is satisfied and deriving and displaying the display result, and the first variation display based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting area. When the start condition of 2 is established, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the second variation display means for deriving and displaying the display result, the first state in which the game ball can win, and the game ball cannot win It can be controlled to any one of the second states, and is controlled to a start operation state that becomes the first state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display means or the second variation display means. Variable winning ball apparatus, and the variable winning ball apparatus Winning area is provided, especially when the game ball is finished in the area, the variable winning ball first and second states the device of the winning region of said variable winning ball device being controlled in the starting operation state And a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is repeatedly controlled a predetermined number of times ,
Whether or not to control the variable winning ball apparatus to the first state by deriving and displaying a predetermined specific display result on the first variation display means or the second variation display means, and deriving and displaying the predetermined display result Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to control and a control mode of the variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state occurs before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display;
In the specific gaming state, gaming state control means for executing the control of the variable winning ball apparatus in the control mode determined by the prior determination means,
Winning detection means for detecting a gaming ball won in the variable winning ball device and outputting a detection signal;
An abnormality determining means for determining that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal when the variable winning ball apparatus is not controlled to the first state;
The predetermining means sets the control state of the variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state is generated in the first state in the specific gaming state generated after the variation display executed by the second variation display means. such that the total period controlled is than the total period controlled to a first state in a specific game state that occurs after the variable display that is performed by the first variable display means, a relatively long period Decide
The game state control means controls the variable winning ball apparatus to the first state when the data indicating the game progress state indicates a numerical value other than a predetermined range of numerical values,
The abnormality determination means determines that the abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal when the data indicating the game progress state shows a numerical value within a predetermined range. Machine. First start of variable display based on a first start area provided in the game area, a second start area provided in the game area, and a game ball winning in the first start area The first variation display means for starting the variation display of the first identification information when the condition is satisfied and deriving and displaying the display result, and the first variation display based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting area. When the start condition of 2 is established, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the second variation display means for deriving and displaying the display result, the first state in which the game ball can win, and the game ball cannot win It can be controlled to any one of the second states, and is controlled to a start operation state that becomes the first state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the first variation display means or the second variation display means. Variable winning ball device and first state in which game balls can be won A specific variable winning ball device that is controllable to any one of the second states in which game balls cannot be won, and the variable winning ball device is provided with a winning area and controlled to the start operation state. When a game ball wins a special area of the winning area of the variable winning ball apparatus, the specific variable winning ball apparatus shifts to a specific gaming state in which the predetermined variable winning ball apparatus is repeatedly controlled in a first state and a second state. A gaming machine
Whether the specific variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to the first state by deriving and displaying a predetermined specific display result on the first fluctuation display means or the second fluctuation display means, and the predetermined display result is derived. Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to display and a control mode of the specific variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state occurs before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display;
In the specific game state, a game state control means for performing control of the specific variable winning ball device in a controlled manner which is determined by the pre-determination means,
Winning detection means for detecting a gaming ball won in the variable winning ball device and outputting a detection signal;
An abnormality determining means for determining that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal when the variable winning ball apparatus is not controlled to the first state;
The predetermining means sets the control mode of the specific variable winning ball apparatus when the specific gaming state occurs in the specific gaming state generated after the variation display executed by the second variation display means . the total period controlled in state, the than the total period controlled to the first state in the specific game state that occurs after the variable display that is performed by the first variable display means, so that a relatively long period determined to be,
The game state control means controls the variable winning ball apparatus to the first state when the data indicating the game progress state indicates a numerical value other than a predetermined range of numerical values,
The abnormality determination means determines that the abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal when the data indicating the game progress state shows a numerical value within a predetermined range. Machine. A discharge detecting means for outputting a detection signal capable of specifying that the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus has been discharged from the variable winning ball apparatus;
The abnormality determining means is further configured by the discharge detecting means that the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus is discharged from the variable winning ball apparatus when the variable winning ball apparatus changes to the first state. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred on the condition that the detection signal output from the winning detection means is input on the condition that it has been detected. Based on the command transmitted by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game, the abnormality notification means for notifying the abnormality by the effect device provided in the gaming machine,
The game control means includes
An abnormality notification command transmitting means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus has occurred;
Specific abnormality notification command transmission means for transmitting a specific abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormal winning to the specific variable winning ball device has occurred;
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the abnormality notification means performs abnormality notification so that an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus and an abnormal winning to the specific variable winning ball apparatus can be distinguished.

Images